JP2020078612A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving enhancement of game amusement.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: game ball shooting means for shooting game balls to a game area; a ball entrance part disposed in the game area and to which game balls can enter; detection means for detecting entrance of game balls to the ball entrance part; and signal output means for outputting a signal when entrance of a game ball to the ball entrance part is not detected by the detection means, despite a fact that a game ball has been shot by the game ball shooting means with a shooting strength satisfying a prescribed shooting condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines, various techniques have been proposed for the purpose of improving the interest of the game and providing a healthier game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-172988, A

  In the gaming machine as described above, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game and providing a healthier game.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes.

[Form]
A game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area,
A ball entering portion provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Detecting means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
A signal is sent when the game ball has not been detected by the detection means, even though the game ball has been emitted by the game ball emission means with a emission intensity satisfying a predetermined emission condition. Signal output means for outputting,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the gaming machine of the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is a front view of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface 41a which are variably displayed in the liquid crystal display device 41. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit/miss table for a 2nd starting opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example (example 1) of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. It is an explanatory view showing a skip effect. 6 is a time chart illustrating an example (example 2) of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect executed by the pachinko machine 10. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for a starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows first judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the change start processing for the 1st starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows the judgment processing for the 1st starting mouth. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation time for the 1st starting ports. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows the change start processing for the 2nd starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows the judgment processing for the 2nd starting mouth. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation time for a 2nd starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd fluctuation stop processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a skip command setting process. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a round number setting process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows entering ball counter setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening limit time setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flowchart which shows an electric power combination opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a game ball launch control process. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows the command corresponding processing for the 1st starting mouth. It is a flow chart which shows the command corresponding processing for the 2nd starting opening. It is a flow chart which shows processing corresponding to a skip execution command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st skip impossible command corresponding processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd skip impossible command corresponding processing. It is a flow chart which shows main processing. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. It is a time chart explaining an example of the processing which the pachinko machine 10 in a 2nd embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows the fluctuation start processing for the 1st starting mouth in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the change start processing for the 1st starting ports in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process (main control) in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball launch control process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormality detection process. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a determination process for the first starting opening according to Modification 4. 20 is a flowchart showing a first variation stop process in Modification 7. 20 is a flowchart showing a second variation stop process in Modification 7. It is a flow chart which shows the game time control processing in the modification 8. 20 is a flowchart showing a variation stop process in Modification 8; It is an explanatory view showing an example of skip promotion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a skip suppression effect. It is a time chart which shows the timing which performs a skip promotion production in the modification 11. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure (example 1) of the game board 30. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure (example 2) of the game board 30. It is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of a game board 30 including a distribution mechanism 150. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the distribution mechanism 150 distributes game balls. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the game board 30 in the modification 15. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the game board 30 in the modification 16. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode until the game sphere emitted from the game sphere emission mechanism 81 enters into the 2nd starting opening 34d.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Overview of processing by amusement machines:
A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A5. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Modification:
F. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments and the like:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as one embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of a big hit lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of big hit winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in the shape of a box with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as loan balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby firing the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling a main game and a function of monitoring a power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the audio emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a design and an image for effect.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80, when a command to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, has a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 or the operation of the game ball firing button 26 by the player. The game ball launching mechanism is controlled so as to launch a ball. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, game balls are supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  On the game board 30, there are a general winning opening 32, a center side first starting opening 33 (hereinafter also simply referred to as a first starting opening 33), a right side first starting opening 44 (hereinafter also simply referred to as a first starting opening 44), A second starting opening 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The center-side first starting opening 33 and the right-side first starting opening 44 are entrance openings into which game balls can enter. The center side first starting opening 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30, and the right first starting opening 44 is provided below the right side of the game board 30 in a front view. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the center-side first starting opening 33 or the right-side first starting opening 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. .. Further, the right first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right first starting opening 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the right side first starting opening 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when a lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35b is won.

  The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. More specifically, the second starting opening 34 is operated when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player so that the emission strength of the game ball becomes the maximum intensity, or the game ball emission button 26 is operated by the player. In this case, it is provided at a position where the game ball shot by the game ball launching mechanism 81 enters. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a jackpot lottery described below is executed. In addition, the second starting port 34 is provided with a non-electric accessory 34a composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The non-electric accessory 34a operates from the open state to the closed state and from the closed state to the open state without using electric power. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, it operates from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when one game ball enters the second starting port 34 when the non-electrical accessory 34a is in the open state, the non-electrical accessory 34a operates from the open state to the closed state, and the second starting port 34 A game ball cannot enter.

  The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are provided with through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. As described above, the through gate 35a is mechanically connected to the non-electrical accessory 34a, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, the non-electrical accessory 34a operates from the closed state to the open state. On the other hand, the through gate 35b is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric accessory 44a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical accessory open lottery) triggered by the passage. If the result of the internal lottery is to win the opening of the electric role, the electric accessory 44a shifts to the open state of the electric role in the open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35b is arranged on the upstream side of the right side first starting opening 44 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down the game area PA after passing and is on the right side. It is possible to enter the first starting opening 44. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning a prize device 36 is provided with a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As described above, when the game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33, the right side first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes the jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the big hit lottery, if the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open/close execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter changes to the open state in which the game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the state transits to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  An outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the center-side first starting opening 33 or the right-side first starting opening 44. When the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44, the first symbol display portion 37a corresponds to the lottery result on the segment display. As a display mode until the display is performed, the variable display of the first symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is performed, the second symbol display portion 37b is a display mode until the segment display is caused to perform a display corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment indicator to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  Here, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display, It is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is called the second variable time.

  The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c formed of an LED lamp at a position adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

  The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting opening (center side 1st starting opening 33 and right side 1st starting opening 44) by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44 are reserved up to a maximum of four as a total of the two first starting openings. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second starting port 34 is not held. That is, the condition that the second symbol is variably displayed is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 in the period in which the second symbol is not variably displayed, while the second symbol is It is a configuration that does not hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 during the period of time in which it is variably displayed.

  The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory release lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35b is performed, the universal figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 36b is continued. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

  Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  The liquid crystal display device 41 is adapted to the case where the first symbol display portion 37a makes a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44. The variable display or predetermined display of symbols is performed. Further, the liquid crystal display device 41, when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol in accordance therewith. Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the variable display or predetermined display of symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the center side first starting opening 33, the right side first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 34. Instead, the effect display in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the jackpot is won, is displayed. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing the first liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal design is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a design corresponding to the first design displayed on the first design display portion 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal surface symbols. In addition, as the variably displayed pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is attached to each of the patterns 1 to 8 may be adopted.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, on the display surface 41a, a first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b, which is an area in which an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed, is set. Further, the display surface 41a is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is an area for displaying a second liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. The second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c is set.

  In the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b, three symbol columns Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged as the first liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 4(a), in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodic upper position. The variable display is scrolled from the bottom to the bottom or from the bottom to the top. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. It Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. In addition, the aspect of the first liquid crystal symbol in the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, various display modes of the first liquid crystal symbol, such as the number of symbol columns in the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. The aspect of can be adopted.

  On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c. In the present embodiment, as the second liquid crystal design, a character image simulating a creature living in the sea such as an octopus, a turtle, or a crab is displayed in the second liquid crystal design display area 41c.

  The aspect of the second liquid crystal symbol in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, as the pattern for the second liquid crystal, various shapes such as a geometrical figure such as a circle, a quadrangle, and a triangle, or a number can be adopted for displaying the pattern for the second liquid crystal. Moreover, you may employ|adopt the aspect which does not display the symbol for 2nd liquid crystals. In this case, the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c is not set on the display surface 41a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first reserved display area Ds1 is displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on the entry of game balls into the central first starting opening 33 and the right first starting opening 44 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the center-side first starting opening 33 and the right-side first starting opening 44 is a maximum of four in total of the two first starting openings. Is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4(b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronization display section Sync1 for displaying and the second synchronization display for performing blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special drawing unit 37. And a part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display portion 37a is performing variable display, the first synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display portion 37a displays a stop signal, the first symbol display portion 37a The 1-synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a light. In addition, when the second symbol display portion 37b is variably displayed, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 displays a blink, and when the second symbol display portion 37b displays a stop, the second synchronization display. The section Sync2 displays a light.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c, the first synchronous display portion Sync1, and the second synchronous display portion Sync2, but the display surface 41a is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a part or all of the display is not displayed.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60, and includes a sound emission controller 90 and a display controller 100. The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, various kinds of general winning opening 32, central first starting opening 33, right first starting opening 44, second starting opening 34, through gate 35b, variable winning device 36, and the like. Various detection sensors provided at the entrance and the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the center-side first starting opening 33, the right-side first starting opening 44, and the second starting opening 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric winning product driving unit 44b that opens and closes the electric winning object 44a of the right first starting opening 44. And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning prize drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. When the electric role opening is selected as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric role driving unit 44b so that the electric role 44a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. Display control is executed.

  A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 on the basis of the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first starting opening (center When the entry of the game balls into the side first starting port 33 and the right side first starting port 44) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and When the entry of the game ball into the 2 starting port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

  A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount, A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is configured to be launched on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes the display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence or absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the effect executed while the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in the jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displaced and changed.

  The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a of the right side first starting opening 44.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. A first reservation area Ra is provided in the reservation information storage area 64b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball. It is chronologically stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the determination process execution area 64c.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and the updated value is the value of the game ball when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at a timing, and when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entering. When the game ball enters the first starting opening (the first starting opening 33 on the center side or the first starting opening 44 on the right side), the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is determined. After moving to the execution area 64c, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c and then stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is collated with the hit/miss table that has been set, and it is determined whether or not to be a big hit.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and the updated value is the value of the entered ball when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at a timing, and when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing of the entering.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicator to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. .. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when it is determined whether a reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to add one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is the reserved information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44). The first reserve area Ra is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. When the game ball enters the first starting opening (the first starting opening 33 on the center side or the first starting opening 44 on the right side), the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is determined. After moving to the execution area 64c, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. Is compared with the reach determination table stored in (1) to determine whether a reach occurs. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), first the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  Further, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of symbols in which reach lines are formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform reach production. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character before the reach display or before the reach display. You may.

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and when the liquid crystal display device 41 starts the fluctuation of the symbol. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

  The combination of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, a combination of a value of the big hit random number counter C1, a value of the big hit type counter C2, and a value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is also called holding information.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric reserve area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35b. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release is executed in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed using the value of the counter C4 to control the electric accessory 44a in the open state. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 44a is controlled in the open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in the closed state.

  Next, the hit/miss table will be described. The win/loss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as lottery modes for the jackpot lottery, and the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability mode. In the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the win/fail table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44. The big hit random number counter C1 and the hit/miss table for checking, and the hit/miss table for checking the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. , Are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), a win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), and a win/loss table for the second starting opening (low). Four win/loss tables, one for the probability mode and one for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode), are stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit/miss table for the first starting opening. FIG. 7A shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows a win/loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for the low probability mode), as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, two pieces (for example, “7” and “341”). The value of is set. Then, among the values of 0 to 599, values other than these values are out of alignment. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the hit/failure table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, eight pieces (for example, “7”, “ 39", "198", "253", "341", "411", "497", "576") are set. Then, among the values of 0 to 599, values other than these values are out of alignment. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the big jackpot in the jackpot lottery, as compared to the low-probability mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability of being a jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/fail table for the second starting opening. FIG. 8A shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 8(b) shows a win/loss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). As shown in FIG. 8A, in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode), two values are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot, and a jackpot which is a jackpot. As the value of the random number C1, 550 values are set. Then, among the values of 0 to 599, values other than these values are out of alignment.

  Here, the "small hit" is a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but is a winning/discarding result that does not trigger a shift in both the lottery mode and the support mode described later. is there. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that the opening/closing execution mode does not trigger the transition, and the lottery mode and the support mode do not trigger the transition.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(b), in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode), eight values are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit, and the small hit. 550 values are set as the values of the jackpot random number C1. Then, among the values of 0 to 599, values other than these values are out of alignment. In this way, also in the win/loss table for the second starting opening, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, as in the win/loss table for the first starting opening. ing. Further, in the hit/damage table for the second starting opening, 550 values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a small hit are set in both the hit/miss table for low probability and the hit/miss table for high probability. When the big hit lottery is executed when the game ball enters the 2 starting port, it is set to be a small hit with a high probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set on the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times of opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of the jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends

  As a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (2) opening/closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball entering the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. In the present embodiment, in the high frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. Is set as follows. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the open/close door 36b in the open/close execution mode is set to continue until 0.2 seconds has elapsed or the number of balls entering the open/close door 36b reaches 6. ..

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds. In the low frequency winning mode of the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 seconds. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the game cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

  The open limit time for one opening of the open/close door 36b and the open limit number for one open are the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the open/close execution mode. If the frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, it is sufficient that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 9A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 9B shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the center-side first starting opening 33 or the right-side first starting opening 44, and the distribution table for the second starting opening. The table is referred to in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the distribution table for the first starting port, 16R as a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the central first starting port 33 or the right first starting port 44. Probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot and 8R regular jackpot are set.

  In the 16R probability variation jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. The lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the jackpot in which the high-probability mode is set.

  In the 8R probability variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. The lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the jackpot in which the high-probability mode is set.

  In the 8R regular jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. The lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the jackpot in which the low-probability mode is set.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 11" correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot and "12 to 19" correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. However, "20 to 29" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the distribution table for the second starting port, 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34.

  In the 2R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode is 2 (2 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the low frequency winning mode. The lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the jackpot in which the low-probability mode is set.

  In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", all the values of "0 to 29" are set to correspond to the 2R normal jackpot.

  In the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit, the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed once (1 round), and the opening/closing door 36b is opened once. Is set to continue until 1.8 seconds elapses or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 6. The lottery mode for the jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is not changed and the lottery mode is maintained as it is.

  Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery is out, the opening/closing execution mode is not changed, and the lottery mode is not changed.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when it is a jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the center-side first starting opening 33 or the right-side first starting opening 44. There is a difference between the case where it is a big hit and the case where it is a big hit based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. .

A3. Overview of processing by amusement machines:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a time chart illustrating an example (example 1) of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The process shown from time Tm1 to time Tm4 shown in FIG. 10 is the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the game ball enters the first starting opening (in this example, the first starting opening 33 on the center side). Showing. The processing shown from time Tm5 to time Tm12 is that the player operates the game ball launch button 26 at a predetermined timing after the game ball has entered the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33). It shows the process that the pachinko machine 10 executes when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34.

  When the player starts the operation (rotation operation) of the operation handle 25 at time Tm1, the game ball launching mechanism 81 launches a game ball into the game area PA. In the present example, it is assumed that the player adjusts the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 so as to insert the game ball into the center-side first starting opening 33.

  Then, when the game ball that is emitted from the game ball firing mechanism 81 and flows down the game area PA enters the first starting opening, the detection sensor for the first starting opening detects the entering of the game ball at time Tm2. In this example, the game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33.

  When the game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm3, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first The variable display of the symbol is started. From the time Tm3 to the time Tm4, that is, the variation time tc1, the first symbol display unit 37a variably displays the first symbol, and then stops and displays the first symbol. The variation time tc1 (from time Tm3 to time Tm4), which is the time for the first symbol to perform variable display, is preset based on the variation type counter CS acquired before the first symbol display unit 37a starts variable display. It's time spent. The result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the first starting opening this time is assumed to be “out”.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the first symbol effect prepared for detachment as an effect from time Tm3 to time Tm4 when the first symbol display portion 37a displays the variable display of the first symbol. Specifically, an effect that combines display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 41, audio output from the speaker 46, driving of a movable accessory, and the like is executed. Then, at the end of the effect for the first symbol for disengagement, stop display of the first symbol is performed with a combination of symbols corresponding to disengagement.

  Next, the processing shown from time Tm5 to time Tm12 will be described. In addition, it is assumed that the player continuously adjusts the operation amount of the operation handle 25 so as to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 on the center side from time Tm1.

  When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball that is emitted from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and flows down the game area PA enters the center-side first starting opening 33, and at time Tm5, the first starting opening The detection sensor detects the entry of the game ball. When a game ball enters the center-side first starting opening 33, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm6, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first value. The variable display of the symbol is started. In addition, also in this example, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is out. Therefore, at the same time that the variable display of the first symbol is started, the pachinko machine 10 starts the effect for the first symbol for disengagement.

  The player recognizes that the variable display of the first symbol and the effect for the first symbol for disengagement are started, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game times related to the effect is unlikely to be a jackpot. Recognizing that, I want to shorten the number of games being played. Then, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 at time Tm7 for the purpose of shortening the number of times the game is being executed, the game ball firing mechanism 81 changes the game area PA from the game ball firing mechanism 81 provided that the touch sensor 25a is on. A game ball is shot at. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch control device 80 adjusts the launch intensity of the game ball in the game ball launch mechanism 81 so that the probability of entering the second starting opening 34 is high, A game ball is shot in the game area PA. Further, in the present embodiment, as described in FIG. 3, when the operation handle 25 is rotated by the player so that the emission intensity of the game ball becomes the maximum intensity, or the game ball is emitted by the player. When the button 26 is operated, the second starting port 34 is arranged at a position on the game area PA where the game ball shot by the game ball launching mechanism 81 enters. That is, the game ball firing button 26 enables the player to intentionally prompt the establishment of the condition for the variable display of the second symbol.

  At time Tm7, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 and the game ball shot in the game area PA enters the second starting port 34, at time Tm8, the detection sensor for the second starting port plays the game. Detects ball entry. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm9, the second symbol display portion 37b displays the second symbol. The variable display of is started.

  From the time Tm9 to the time Tm10, that is, during the variation time tc4, the second symbol display portion 37b variably displays the second symbol, and then stops and displays the second symbol. The variation time tc4 (from time Tm9 to time Tm10), which is the time when the second symbol displays the variable display, is preset based on the variation type counter CS acquired before the second symbol display unit 37b starts the variable display. It's time to go. In addition, the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired at the time of entering the second starting opening this time is assumed to be "small hit". In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol when the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is "small hit" is set to all 1 second. There is. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time tc4 is 1 second.

  After the variation time tc4 has elapsed since the second symbol display unit 37b started the variable display, that is, at time Tm10, the second symbol display unit 37b stops the variable display of the second symbol.

  At this time, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a which has been displayed in a variable manner is the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b although the initially set variation time tc2 has not elapsed. At the timing (time Tm10) when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display is switched to the stopped display. As a result, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b are stopped and displayed almost at the same time. Then, at time Tm11, the variable winning device is opened once when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is a small hit. In this case, the variable winning device is opened for 0.2 seconds.

  The above process will be specifically described. The variation time tc2, which is the time at which the first symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a displays the variation, is based on the variation type counter CS acquired before the first symbol display unit 37a starts the variation display. It is set. Therefore, normally, the first symbol display portion 37a causes the first symbol to be variably displayed with the entry of the game ball into the center-side first starting opening 33 as a trigger, and the time to variably display the first symbol. When the preset variation time tc2 as the variation time has elapsed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

  However, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is a case where the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, and the first symbol combination that the first symbol display portion 37a causes the stop display is a big hit. When the combination corresponding to “out” in the lottery, and the combination of the second symbols stopped and displayed by the second symbol display portion 37b is a combination corresponding to “small hit” or “big hit” in the big hit lottery The first symbol is also stopped and displayed when the second symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, the variation time of the first symbol is based on the combination of the first symbols stopped and displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a, and the combination of the second symbols which the second symbol display unit 37b stops and displays. , A shorter time (variation time tc3 in this example) than a preset variation time (variation time tc2 in this example).

  In the present embodiment, after the first symbol starts the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display, and the combination of the first symbols to be stopped operates the variable winning device 36. Not a combination of symbols, and when the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed is a combination of the symbols for operating the variable winning device 36, the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time. Shorten to.

  In the present embodiment, the first combination of symbols for operating the variable winning device 36 is a combination of symbols corresponding to the “big hit” in the big hit lottery. The second symbol combination for operating the variable winning device 36 is a symbol combination corresponding to the "big hit" or "small hit" in the big hit lottery.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped and displayed by a symbol combination corresponding to “out”, which is a symbol combination that does not operate the variable winning device 36, and the second symbol display. The part 37b stops and displays a combination of symbols corresponding to "small hit" which is a combination of symbols for operating the variable winning device 36, so that the pachinko machine 10 changes the variation time of the first symbol from the variation time tc2. It is shortened to the variation time tc3, and when the second symbol is stopped and displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10, the player intentionally inserts the game ball into the second starting opening 34 by operating the game ball firing button 26 while the first symbol is variable and displayed, and The pattern of 2 is variably displayed. When the first symbol to be stopped and displayed is “out”, and the second symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, when the second symbol is stopped and displayed, the first symbol Also stop display. In other words, the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player while the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, so that the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time. Allows the player to intentionally prompt. The game ball can be inserted into the second starting opening 34 by the player rotating the operation handle 25 to shoot the game ball into the game area PA, but the player shoots the game ball button. It is easily enabled by manipulating 26. That is, the game ball launch button 26 plays a role of assisting the operation for the player to launch the game ball.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 displays a variable display when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner and when the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time. The "skip effect" that suggests that the first symbol that is present is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, at the time when the first symbol starts the variable display, the effect for the first symbol that was set to be executed at the variable time tc2 from the time Tm6 to the time Tm12 is interrupted at the time Tm9. At the same time, from time Tm9 to time Tm10 when the first symbol and the second symbol stop display, that is, during the variation time tc4 of the second symbol, the skip effect is executed. The skip effect is an effect that omits or omits (skips) the variable display of the first symbol or the effect for the first symbol (skips), and suggests that the first symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing skip effects. FIG. 11A shows an example of an image displayed on the display surface 41a when the skip effect is executed. In the skip effect in the present embodiment, the female character omits or omits (skips) the variable display of the first symbol or the effect for the first symbol (skips), and the first symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a production that suggests.

  After executing the skip effect, the pachinko machine 10 stops and displays the first symbol and the second symbol on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, respectively, at time Tm10, and the display surface. On 41a, a liquid crystal design, which is an image corresponding to the first and second designs stopped and displayed, is displayed.

  FIG. 12 is a time chart illustrating an example (example 2) of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In this example, an example in which the pachinko machine 10 does not shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time will be described.

  When the player starts operating the operation handle 25 at time Tm1, the game ball launching mechanism 81 launches a game ball into the game area PA. In this example, the player adjusts the turning operation amount of the operation handle 25 so as to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 on the center side.

  Then, when the game ball that is emitted from the game ball firing mechanism 81 and flows down the game area PA enters the first starting opening, the detection sensor for the first starting opening detects the entering of the game ball at time Tm2. In this example, the game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33.

  When the game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm3, the first symbol display unit 37a displays the first The variable display of the symbol is started. In the present example, it is assumed that the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired upon the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is a "jackpot".

  When the first symbol display unit 37a starts the variable display of the first symbol, the pachinko machine 10 executes, as an effect, the first symbol effect prepared for the big hit. Specifically, an effect that combines display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 41, audio output from the speaker 46, driving of a movable accessory, and the like is executed.

  When the player who recognizes that the variable display of the first symbol and the effect for the first symbol is started operates the game ball firing button 26 at time Tm4, the game is performed on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. A game ball is shot from the ball shooting mechanism 81 to the game area PA. As described above, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the launch controller 80 determines the launch intensity of the game ball in the game ball launch mechanism 81 as the probability that the game ball will enter the second starting opening 34. Is adjusted to be high, and a game ball is shot in the game area PA.

  At time Tm4, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 and the game ball shot in the game area PA enters the second starting port 34, at time Tm5, the detection sensor for the second starting port plays the game. Detects ball entry. When the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm6, the second symbol display portion 37b displays the second symbol. The variable display of is started.

  From the time Tm6 to the time Tm7, that is, the variation time tc2, the second symbol display unit 37b variably displays the second symbol, and then stops and displays the second symbol. The variation time tc2 (from time Tm6 to time Tm7), which is the time for the second symbol to perform variable display, is based on the variation type counter CS acquired before the second symbol display section 37b starts variable display. It is the set time. In addition, the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired at the time of entering the second start opening this time is assumed to be “out”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol when the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the entry into the second starting opening 34 is “out” is all set to 1 second. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time tc2 is 1 second.

  After the variation time tc2 has elapsed since the second symbol display unit 37b started the variable display, that is, at the time Tm7, the second symbol display unit 37b stops the variable display of the second symbol. That is, the second symbol display portion 37b displays the second symbol as a stop.

  At this time, in the example shown in FIG. 11 (example 1), the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a which has been variably displayed, the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b is the stop display. At the timing, the display changed from the variable display to the stop display, but in the present example (Example 2), the first symbol display section 37a displaying the variable display stops the second symbol of the second symbol display section 37b. Even at the display timing, the variable display is continued without shifting to the stop display. That is, the variation time of the first symbol is not shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time.

  In addition, during the time Tm7 when the second symbol display unit 37b starts the variable display and after the time Tm6 when the stop display is performed, that is, during the variation time tc2, the pachinko machine 10 executes the non-skipable effect. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a second starting opening after the game ball enters the center-side first starting opening 33 (or the right-side first starting opening 44) and the first symbol starts changing display. When the game ball enters 34 and the second symbol starts the variable display, and when the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time is not executed , Execute the non-skipable effect.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect executed by the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 13A shows an example of a non-skipable effect. FIG. 13A shows a display surface 41a that displays a non-skipable effect. The non-skipable effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that the female character cannot omit or omit (skip) the variable display of the first symbol or the effect for the first symbol. In other words, the non-skipable effect is an effect that suggests that the first symbol is not stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34. As shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, the non-skipable effect is inserted during execution of the first symbol effect for jackpot when triggered by entering the center side first starting opening 33 ( It is executed as a so-called cut-in effect. That is, on the display surface 41a, the image of the non-skipable effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the image of the first symbol effect for big hit.

  A player who recognizes that the first symbol is not stopped and displayed despite having entered the game ball into the second starting opening 34, operates the game ball firing button 26 again at time Tm8 to play the game. Even when the game ball shot in the area PA enters the second starting port 34, the detection sensor for the second starting port detects the entering of the game ball at time Tm9, and from time Tm10 to time Tm11. , The variable display of the second symbol and the non-skipable effect are executed, and the first symbol display part 37a that is displaying the variable symbol, even at the timing when the second symbol of the second symbol display part 37b displays the stop, The variable display is continued without shifting to the stop display. That is, the variation time reduction process is not executed.

  After that, at time Tm12, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 again to enter the game ball shot in the game area PA into the second starting opening 34, at time Tm13, The detection sensor for the starting opening detects the entry of the game ball. Then, from time Tm14 to time Tm15, the variable display of the second symbol is executed, and the jackpot notification effect is executed.

  The jackpot notification presentation is when the result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44) is a big hit. , Is executed when the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol is less than or equal to a predetermined time.

  More specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44) is a "big hit" In, after the first symbol starts variable display by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port, the game ball enters the second starting port 34 and the second symbol starts variable display. In the case, when the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time is not executed, the non-skipable effect or the big hit notification effect is executed. Whether to execute the non-skipable effect or the jackpot notification effect is selected and determined according to the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol. In the present embodiment, at the time of executing the non-skipable effect or the jackpot notification effect, if the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is longer than 5 seconds, the non-skipable effect is executed, and the first symbol When the remaining time of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less, the jackpot notification effect is executed.

  The jackpot notification presentation is performed by displaying an image notifying that the jackpot is on the display surface 41a, turning on various lamps 47 included in the pachinko machine 10, and outputting sound from the speaker 46 to the first start opening (center side). This is an effect that informs the player that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44) is "big hit".

  FIG.13(b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the jackpot notification production. In FIG.13(b), the display surface 41a which displays the jackpot notification production was shown. The jackpot notification effect in the present embodiment is an effect in which the female character notifies that the result of the jackpot lottery is “bonus”. By executing the jackpot effect, the player recognizes that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is "big hit", and the game ball to the second starting opening 34. I recognized that the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening was "big hit" that the first symbol did not stop even though the ball was entered. To do.

  After the jackpot notification effect is executed, the first symbol of the combination indicating that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is “bonnet” is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. In addition, on the effective line L of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display surface 41a, liquid crystal symbols of a combination corresponding to the first symbol stopped and displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a are displayed.

  After that, the special game state effect including the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is executed, and at the time Tm17 to Tm18, the variable winning device is opened/closed and the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

  The outline of the processing by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has been described above.

A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The processing executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S103.

  In step S103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are each incremented by one, and when the respective counter values reach their maximum values, they are cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S104.

  In step S104, a ball-entry process for the starting port associated with the game ball entering the first starting port (the central first starting port 33, the right first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34 is executed. The details of the entrance process for the starting opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 14: S104) of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (start winning) the first starting opening (the center-side first starting opening 33 or the right-side first starting opening 44). 1 The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the starting port 44. When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port (the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44) (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202 and payout control is performed. A prize ball command for paying out three game balls to the device 70 is set. Then, it progresses to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44 to the management control device on the game hall side. To do. Then, it progresses to step S204.

  In step S204, it is determined whether or not the first startup pending number RaN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S204, if the first starting pending number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (S204: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended. Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the game balls that enter the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44 are reserved up to a maximum of four as a total of the two first starting openings. It

  On the other hand, in step S204, when the first startup hold number RaN is less than the upper limit value (S204: YES), the process proceeds to step S205, and 1 is added to the first start hold number RaN of the corresponding hold area. Then, it progresses to step S206.

  In step S206, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are set to the first storage area of the corresponding free storage areas, that is, the step The value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first starting suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in S205. After executing step S206, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S207, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (held information), the jackpot lottery determination result (lottery result), jackpot type, and the occurrence of reach. It is a process of performing the determination of the presence or absence of, etc., before the holding information is subjected to the jackpot lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step S207, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

  The hold command is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening (the center side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44) and the holding information acquired based on the entering ball. It is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize the determination result of the determination process before the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402) of the normal process described later.

  In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the central side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44), A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in response to the increase in the number of hold is transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 so as to correspond to the increase in the hold number.

  In step S201, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44) (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S209. Whether the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting opening 34.

  When it is determined in step S209 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and the payout control device 70 pays out one game ball. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step S211. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (S209: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

  In step S211, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. Then, it progresses to step S212.

  In step S212, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode flag of the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when the game state is changed to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned off when the open/close execution mode is also ended in the game state transition process. When it is determined in step S212 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (step S212: NO), the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S212 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (step S212: YES), the ball entry process for the main starting opening is ended.

  In step S213, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second fluctuation flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b starts to fluctuate when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, and the second symbol fluctuates. This is a flag that is turned off when stopping.

  When it is determined in step S213 that the second changing flag is not ON (step S213: NO), the process proceeds to step S214. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S213 that the second changing flag is ON (step S213: YES), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

  In step S214, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After executing step S214, the process proceeds to step S215.

  In step S215, the second start entrance ball flag of the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The second start entrance ball flag is turned on when a game ball enters the second start opening 34, and is turned off when the second symbol starts fluctuating triggered by the entrance of the second start opening 34. To be After executing step S215, the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S207) of a ball entry process for the starting opening.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the determination process such as the jackpot lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence/absence of the reach occurrence, and the like are determined based on the hold information. This is a process that is executed before the target of the lottery.

  In step S301, the game ball is stored in the storage area by entering the game ball into the first starting port (the center side first starting port 33 or the right side first starting port 44) in the starting port entering process (FIG. 15). The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the big hit lottery by entering the game ball this time is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the previous determination process executed by the entry of the game ball prior to the entry of the game ball this time is read from the corresponding storage area, and from the jackpot lottery due to the entry of the game ball this time. Also, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the entry of the game ball this time is executed as the game time is determined by grasping the presence or absence of the probability variation jackpot that occurs before.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery by entering the game ball this time is executed as the game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, The win/loss table for the first starting opening (for the low probability mode) stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. .

  On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery by entering the current game ball is executed as the game time (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304. As a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and is stored by the game ball entering the starting opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the area is read. After that, the process advances to step S307 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

  In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. When it determines with it corresponding to a probability variation jackpot in step S308 (S308:YES), it progresses to step S309 and memorize|stores probability variation jackpot information in the previous determination process result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311, and the game ball enters the starting opening this time. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area is read. After that, the process advances to step S312 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. After that, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

  In step S313, when it is determined that the reach occurrence is supported (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step S313, when it is determined that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (S313: NO), the previous determination process is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step S402.

  In step S402, the output data such as the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S404.

  In step S404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a, the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S405, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In step S406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S407.

  In step S407, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric role object 44a provided in the right side first starting port 44 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is to be opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S408.

  In step S408, a game ball launch control process is executed. The game ball launch control process is a process executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26. Details of the game ball launch control process will be described later. After executing step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

  In step S409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process of this time (start of the command output process of step S402 in the second and subsequent cycles). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come.

  When it is determined in step S409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S409: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps S410 and S411. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S411, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, in step S409, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S409: YES), the process returns to step S402, and the processes from step S402 to step S408 are performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S402 to step S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 17: S405).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the game number control process. In step S501, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is changed to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is similarly ended in the game state transition process.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (S501: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any of the processing from step S502. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, is the game ball entering the first starting opening (the central starting opening 33, the right first starting opening 44) or the second starting opening 34? Regardless of whether or not, the game time will not be started. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, it is determined whether or not the first changing flag is ON. The first changing flag, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a changes when the game ball enters the first starting port (the first starting port 33 on the center side, the first starting port 44 on the right side) It is a flag that is turned on when starting, and turned off when the first symbol stops changing. When it is determined in step S502 that the first changing flag is not ON (S502: NO), the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, a variation start process for the first starting port is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S505.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S502 that the first changing flag is ON (S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the first fluctuation stop process is executed. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON. As described above, the second changing flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b starts to change with the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, and The symbol 2 is a flag that is turned off when the fluctuation is stopped. When it is determined in step S505 that the second changing flag is not ON (S505: NO), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, the variation start process for the second starting opening is executed. The details of the variation start process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S506, the present game time control processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S505 that the second changing flag is ON (S505: YES), the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, the second fluctuation stop process is executed. Details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S507, the present game time control processing is ended.

<Variation start process for the first starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be described. The variation start process for the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S503) of the game time control process.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the first starting port. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the first starting pending number RaN=0. When it is determined in step S601 that the first startup hold number RaN is not 0 (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S601 that the first startup hold number RaN=0 (S601: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first starting opening ends.

  In step S602, a pending information shift process is executed. In the reservation information shift processing, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is shifted. Details of the reservation information shift processing will be described later. After executing step S602, the process proceeds to step S603.

  In step S603, the determination process for the first starting opening is executed. In the determination process for the first starting opening, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the hit/miss determination for determining whether there is a jackpot or a jackpot, and the jackpot type are distributed. The distribution determination and the reach determination for determining whether the reach has occurred are performed. Details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S603, the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, a variable time setting process for the first starting port is executed. In the variable time setting process for the first starting opening, the variable time, which is the time from when the symbol starts to change to when it stops, is set. The details of the setting process of the variation time for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S604, the process proceeds to step S605.

  In step S605, the first variation command is set. The first variation command relates to special information obtained this time based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44). In addition to including the information indicating that the reach is generated, the information regarding the presence/absence of the reach occurrence and the information regarding the variation time set in step S604 are included. After executing step S605, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, the first type command is set. The first type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and information on the big hit type. Specifically, the first-type command includes 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or out-of-range information.

  The variation command and the first type command set in steps S605 and S606 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S607, the variable display on the first symbol display portion 37a is started, and then the process proceeds to step S608 to turn on the first changing flag. After executing step S608, the process proceeds to step S609.

  In step S609, the value of the game number counter PCN is decremented by 1. The game number counter PCN is set to a value in the game number counter PCN when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 each time the game number is executed. After executing step S609, the fluctuation start process for the first starting port is ended.

<Pending information shift processing>
Next, the pending information shift process will be described. The hold information shift processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S602) of the variation start processing for the first starting opening.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the pending information shift processing. In step S701, 1 is subtracted from the first startup reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra. Then, it progresses to step S702.

  In step S702, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Then, it progresses to step S703.

  In step S703, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S703, the on-hold information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for the first starting opening>
Next, the determination process for the first starting port will be described. The determination process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S603) of the variation starting process for the first starting port.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting opening. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second hit flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed upon the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 is "big hit" or "small hit", and the second start concerned. The variable display of the second symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the mouth 34 is stopped, and is turned OFF when the stop display is displayed. When it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is not ON (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S802. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816.

  In step S802, it is determined whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Normally, it is turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to winning the jackpot. When it is determined in step S802 that the high probability mode is set (S802: YES), the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for the high probability mode) shown in FIG. 7B. It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step S805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the high probability mode is not set in step S802 (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 7A. It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step S805.

  In step S805, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in step S803 or step S804 is a big hit. When it is determined in step S805 that the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S806.

  In step S806, the first hit flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. As for the first hit flag, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first start opening (the first start opening 33 on the center side or the first start opening 44 on the right side) is “big hit”. In this case, it is turned on, and the variable display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port is stopped, and when it is stopped, it is turned off. After executing step S806, the process proceeds to step S807.

  In step S807, the distribution determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the first starting opening (see FIG. 9A). Specifically, it is determined which of the jackpot types the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step S807, the process proceeds to step S808.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step S807 is a probability variation big hit. When it is determined in step S808 that the sorted jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

  In step S809, the probability variation big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S808 is turned on. After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

  In step S810, a stop symbol setting process for probability variation jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, at the current game time when the probability variation jackpot is set, the first symbol display portion 37a sets which stop result is displayed (variation display) in which the variation display is terminated (stop display). Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is acquired, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S810, the determination process of the first starting port is ended.

  When it is determined in step S808 that the sorted jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot (S808: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S811.

  In step S811, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is turned on. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, a normal jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal jackpot, at the current game time when the jackpot is normally hit, the first symbol display section 37a sets which stop result is displayed (stop display). Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S808 is obtained, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S812, the determination process of the first starting port is ended.

  When it is determined in step S805 that the result of the hit determination in step S803 or step S804 is not a big hit (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. The reach determination is made as to whether or not the reach occurs by referring to the determination table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the referred reach determination table. The process of step S813 is executed when the result of the win/no determination (big hit lottery) in step S805 is not a big hit. That is, in step S813, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/miss determination is a game number in which reach is generated among the game numbers that are not a big hit. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S814, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step S813 is reach occurrence. When it is determined in step S814 that the reach has occurred (S814: YES), the process proceeds to step S815, and the reach generation flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step S815, the process proceeds to step S816. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S814 that the reach has not occurred (S814: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 without executing step S815.

  In step S816, a stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is disengaged, to set which stop result is displayed (stop display) in the state in which the stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. Execute the process. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is displayed. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S816, the determination process for the first starting port is ended.

  Here, as described above, in step S801, when it is determined that the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816, and by executing the stop symbol setting process for detachment, The stop display for disengagement is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. That is, the game ball enters the second starting port 34 first, before the variable display of the second symbol due to the game ball entering the second starting port 34 stops, the first starting port (center When the game ball enters the side first starting opening 33 or the right side first starting opening 44), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entering of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is “big hit”. In the case of "or a small hit", the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44) is not executed, The stop display for disengagement is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. The lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 is “big hit” or “small hit” by the variation stop process (FIG. 23) of the first start opening described later. In this case, the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b shifts from the variable display to the stop display, and at the same time, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a shifts from the variable display to the stop display (FIG. 23: S1001, S1007 to S1010). Furthermore, as described above, the first symbol and the second symbol do not start variably displayed until the opening/closing execution mode ends by the process of step S501 of the game time control process (FIG. 18).

  As a result, in the second symbol display portion 37b, from the time when the combination of symbols that will operate the variable winning device 36 is displayed to the time when the operation of the variable winning device 36 ends, the first symbol display portion 37a. Is stopped with a symbol that does not operate the variable winning device 36, and the display is continued in that state.

<Variation time setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port will be described. The setting process of the variation time for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 19: S604) of the variation starting process for the first starting port.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the variation time for the first starting port. In step S901, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step S902.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit/non-judgment related to the current game is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is obtained by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S903, the process proceeds to step S907, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first starting port is ended.

  When it is determined in step S902 that the result of the hit/no hit determination related to the current game number is not a big hit (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S904, and the result of the reach determination related to the current game number is reach occurrence. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag is ON, and when it is determined that the reach generation flag is ON (S904: YES), the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. After executing step S905, the process proceeds to step S907, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first starting port is ended.

  When it is determined in step S904 that the reach determination result related to the current game number is not reach occurrence (S904: NO), the process proceeds to step S906, and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is not generated. The fluctuation time table corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for use. After executing step S906, the process proceeds to step S907, and the acquired variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first starting port is ended.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of the first starting pending numbers RaN, and the variation time is set to be shorter as the number of the first starting pending numbers RaN is smaller. May be.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between the jackpot winning time and the outlying reach. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit and the variation time table for the normal big hit may be individually set.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first fluctuation stop processing is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S504) of the game time control processing.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The second hit flag is turned ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed upon the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 is "big hit" or "small hit", and the second start concerned. The variable display of the second symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the mouth 34 is stopped, and is turned OFF when the stop display is displayed. When it is determined in step S1001 that the second hit flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable time for the first symbol set in the variable time setting process for the first starting opening (FIG. 22) has elapsed. When it is determined in step S1002 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, in step S1002, when it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has not expired (S1002: NO), the first variation stop processing is terminated.

  In step S1003, the fluctuation of the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed is set in step S801, step S812, or step S816 of the determination process (FIG. 21) for the first starting opening. After executing step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004.

  In step S1004, the first changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. As described above, the first fluctuating flag is the first symbol display portion 37a of the first symbol display portion 37a triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the center side first starting opening 33, the right side first starting opening 44). It is a flag that is turned on when the first symbol starts changing, and turned off when the first symbol stops changing. After executing step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the second changing flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b starts to change with the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, and The symbol 2 is a flag that is turned off when the fluctuation is stopped. When it is determined in step S1005 that the second changing flag is not ON (S1005: NO), the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, the first hit flag is turned off. Then, the first variation stop process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1005 that the second fluctuation flag is ON (S1005: YES), the first fluctuation stopping process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1001 that the second hit flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, it is determined whether the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 26) for the second starting port, which will be described later, has elapsed. When it is determined in step S1007 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002. On the other hand, in step S1007, when it is determined that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended (S1007: YES), the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, the second hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step S1008, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  In step S1009, the fluctuation of the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. That is, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed is set in step S801, step S812, or step S816 of the determination process (FIG. 21) for the first starting opening. After executing step S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010.

  In step S1010, the first changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the first variation stop process is ended.

<Variation start process for the second starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be described. The variation start process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S506) of the game time control process.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the second starting port. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second start entrance ball flag of the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S1101 that the second start-port entrance flag is ON (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the second start-port entrance flag is not ON (S1101: NO), the variation start process for the second start-port is ended.

  In step S1102, the second start entrance ball flag is turned off. After executing step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, the determination process for the second starting opening is executed. In the determination process for the second starting opening, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, the hit/miss determination for determining the presence/absence of a jackpot or a jackpot, and the jackpot type are distributed. The distribution determination and the reach determination for determining whether the reach has occurred are performed. The details of the determination process for the second starting opening will be described later. After executing step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, a variable time setting process for the second starting opening is executed. In the setting process of the variation time for the second starting opening, the variation time, which is the time from when the symbol starts varying to when it stops, is set. Details of the setting process of the variation time for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, and the reach The information on the presence/absence of occurrence and the information on the fluctuation time set in step S1104 are included. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In step S1106, the type command is set. The type command includes information on whether there is a big hit or a small hit, and information on the big hit type. Specifically, the type command includes 2R normal big hit information, small hit information, or miss information.

  The variation command and the type command set in steps S1105 and S1106 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, a skip command setting process is executed. Details of the skip command setting process will be described later. After executing step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, variable display in the second symbol display portion 37b is started. In the determination process for the second starting opening in step S1103, which will be described in detail later, the reach generation flag is ON when it is determined that the reach has been generated, but in that case, the reach generation flag is turned OFF. To do. After executing step S1108, the process proceeds to step S1109.

  In step S1109, the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step S1109, the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, the counter value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. After that, the fluctuation start process for the second starting port is ended.

<Determination process for the second starting opening>
Next, the determination process for the second starting port will be described. The determination process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (Fig. 24: S1103) of the variation starting process for the second starting port.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second starting opening. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S1201 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variation jackpot. Normally, it is turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to winning the jackpot. When it is determined in step S1202 that the high probability mode is set (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/no win table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode) shown in FIG. 8B. It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step S1205. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1202 that the high probability mode is not set (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1204.

  In step S1204, the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit/miss table for the second starting opening (for the low probability mode) shown in FIG. 8A. It is determined whether or not the value matches the existing value. Then, it progresses to step S1205.

  In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in step S1203 or step S1204 is a big hit. When it is determined in step S1205 that the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit (S1205: YES), the process proceeds to step S1206.

  In step S1206, the second hit flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, the distribution determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 9B). Specifically, it is determined which of the jackpot types the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. In the present embodiment, 2R normal big hit is set as the big hit type in the distribution table for the second starting opening. After executing step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208. In addition, in the present embodiment, only the 2R normal big hit is set as the big hit type in the distribution table for the second starting opening, so that the processing of steps S1208 to S1210 described below is not performed in the present embodiment. Not executed

  In step S1208, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step S1207 is a probability variation big hit. When it is determined in step S1208 that the sorted jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot (S1208: YES), the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S1208 is turned ON. Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second starting opening, so this processing is not executed. After executing step S1209, the process proceeds to step S1210.

  In step S1210, a stop symbol setting process for probability variation jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game times to be the probability variation jackpot, the second symbol display portion 37b is set to which variable display is to be ended (stop display) in the state in which any stop result is displayed. Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is acquired, The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1210, the determination process of the second starting opening is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S1208 that the sorted jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot (S1208: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1211, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S1208 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, since only the 2R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the distribution table for the second starting opening, the jackpot type flag corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot is set to ON. After executing Step S1211, the process proceeds to Step S1212.

  In step S1212, a normal jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for normal jackpot, in the current game time when it is a normal jackpot, the process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed. Run. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S1208 is acquired, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1212, the determination process of the second starting opening is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1205 that the result of the hit determination in step S1203 or step S1204 is not a big hit (S1205: NO), the process proceeds to step S1311, and it is determined whether the result of the hit determination is a small hit. .. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the jackpot. When it is determined in step S1213 that the result of the hit determination is a small hit (S1213: YES), the process proceeds to step S1214.

  In step S1214, the second hit flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S1215, and the small hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step S1215, the process proceeds to step S1216.

  In step S1216, a stop symbol setting process for small hits is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for small hits, a process for setting which of the stop results is displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b in the second game display, which is the small hit, is set. Run. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Is acquired and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1216, the determination process for the second starting opening is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S1201 that the first hit flag is ON (S1201: YES), or when it is determined in step S1213 that the result of the hit/miss determination is not a small hit (S1213: NO), it is for removal. The stop symbol setting process is executed. With the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is disengaged, a process for setting which stop result is displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed. To do. Specifically, by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is displayed. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S1217, the determination process for the second starting opening is terminated.

  In the determination process for the second starting port, unlike the determination process for the first starting port (FIG. 21: S813 to S815) described in FIG. 21, a process for generating reach using the reach random number counter C3 is performed. Do not execute. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is mainly intended to stop the variable display of the first symbol. Therefore, when the player intentionally inserts the game ball into the second starting opening 34 by operating the game ball firing button 26, the second ball is launched as close as possible to the timing at which the game ball launch button 26 is operated. It is desirable that the symbol 2 shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, it is not desirable to execute the reach effect, which requires a relatively long time, as the effect performed while the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the reach effect from being executed at the time of the variable display of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening In the determination processing for use, the processing for generating the reach by the reach random number counter C3 is not executed.

<Variation time setting process for the second starting opening>
Next, the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port will be described. The setting process of the variation time for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the variation starting process for the second starting port (FIG. 24: S1104).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the variation time for the second starting opening. In step S1301, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the variation time table corresponding to the current variation type counter CS value is acquired by referring to the variation time table for the second starting opening stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation times set in the fluctuation time table for the second starting opening that are referred to in the fluctuation time setting process for the second starting opening are all 1 second. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is mainly intended to stop the variable display of the first symbol. There is. Therefore, when the player intentionally inserts the game ball into the second starting opening 34 by operating the game ball firing button 26, the second ball is launched as close as possible to the timing at which the game ball launch button 26 is operated. It is desirable that the symbol 2 shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, the variation time table for the second starting opening is set so that the variation time of the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 becomes a relatively short time of 1 second. There is. After executing step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303, and the obtained fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the second starting port is ended.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be described. The second fluctuation stop processing is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S507) of the game time control processing.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As for the first hit flag, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44) is “big hit”. In this case, it is turned on, and the variable display of the first symbol due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is stopped, and when it is stopped, it is turned off. When it is determined in step S1401 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the changing time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time for the second symbol set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 26) for the second starting opening has elapsed. When it is determined in step S1402 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has ended (S1402: YES), the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1402 that the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended (S1402: NO), the second variation stop processing is terminated.

  In step S1403, the fluctuation of the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped. That is, the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b is changed from the state in which it is variably displayed to the stop display. The combination of symbols (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is set in step S1210, step S1212, step S1216, or step S1217 of the determination process (FIG. 25) for the second starting opening. After executing step S1403, the process advances to step S1404.

  In step S1404, the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. As described above, the second changing flag is turned ON when the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b starts to change with the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, and The symbol 2 is a flag that is turned off when the fluctuation is stopped. After executing step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, it is determined whether the first changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As described above, the first changing flag is the first symbol display portion 37a of the first symbol display portion 37a triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44). It is a flag that is turned on when the first symbol starts changing, and turned off when the first symbol stops changing. When it is determined in step S1405 that the first changing flag is not ON (S1405: NO), the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, the second hit flag is turned off. Then, the second fluctuation stop process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1405 that the first changing flag is ON (S1405: YES), the second changing stop process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1401 that the first hit flag is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1407, it is determined whether the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable time for the first symbol set in the variable time setting process for the first starting opening (FIG. 22) has elapsed. When it is determined in step S1407 that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has not ended (S1407: NO), the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, in step S1407, when it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol display portion 37a has ended (S1407: YES), the process proceeds to step S1408.

  In step S1408, the first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. After executing step S1408, the process proceeds to step S1409.

  In step S1409, the fluctuation of the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped. That is, the first symbol on the second symbol display portion 37b is changed from the variable display state to the stop display. The combination of symbols (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is set in step S1210, step S1212, step S1216, or step S1217 of the determination process (FIG. 25) for the second starting opening. After executing step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, the second changing flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned off. Then, the second fluctuation stop process is ended.

<Skip command setting process>
Next, the skip command setting process will be described. The skip command setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 24: S1107) of the variation start process for the second starting opening.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the skip command setting process. This skip command setting processing is processing for determining whether or not to execute the above-described skip effect (see FIG. 11A) and non-skip effect (see FIG. 13A).

  In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a is 1 second or more. When it is determined in step S1501 that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a is not 1 second or more (S1501: NO), the setting process of this skip command is ended as it is. As described in FIG. 10 and FIG. 12, the skip effect and the non-skipable effect are performed using the variation time of the second symbol. As described above, since the variation time of the second symbol is all set to 1 second, it takes 1 second to execute the skip effect or the non-skipable effect. Therefore, when the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a is less than 1 second, neither the skip effect nor the non-skip effect is executed. When the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a is less than 1 second, the effect set for the variable display of the first symbol is executed as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1501, when it is determined that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a is 1 second or more (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1502, and the first hit flag is ON. Determine whether or not. When it is determined in step S1502 that the first hit flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, the first non-skipable command is set. The first non-skipable command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the non-skipable effect is to be executed, and is a command output process of normal processing. (FIG. 17: Step S402), and it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S1503, the setting process of the skip command ends.

When it is determined in step S1502 that the first hit flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1504. In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the second hit flag is ON. When it is determined in step S1504 that the second hit flag is ON (S1504: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1505, a skip execution command is set. The skip execution command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the skip effect is to be executed, and is a command output process of the normal process (see FIG. : The voice light emission control device 90 is transmitted in step S402). After executing step S1505, the setting process of the skip command ends.

  When it is determined in step S1504 that the second hit flag is not ON (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, the second unskipable command is set. The second non-skipable command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the non-skipable effect is to be executed, and is a command output process of normal processing (FIG. 17: Step S402), and it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S1506, the setting process of the skip command ends.

  Here, the difference between the first non-skipable command set in step S1503 and the second non-skipable command set in step S1506 will be described.

  The first non-skipable command is set in the following cases. The game ball enters the second starting opening 34 after the first symbol starts changing display in response to the game ball entering the central first starting opening 33 (or the right first starting opening 44). In the case where the second symbol starts the variable display triggered by doing, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is "bonus", The variable display of the first symbol does not shift to the stop display at the timing when the variable display of the second symbol shifts to the stop display, and is set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 22) for the first starting opening. A stop display is displayed when the variable time has elapsed. In this case, the first skip impossible command is set and the skip effect is not executed.

  The second non-skipable command is set in the following cases. The game ball enters the second start opening 34 after the first symbol starts changing display triggered by the game ball entering the central first start opening 33 (or the right first start opening 44). In the case where the second symbol starts the variable display as a result of doing, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry into the second starting opening is “out” (not “big jackpot”) , "If it is not a "small hit"), the fluctuation of the first symbol at the timing when the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 shifts to the stop display. The display does not shift to the stop display. In this case, the second skip impossible command is set and the skip effect is not executed. However, in this case, if the variable display of the second symbol is executed a plurality of times during the variable display of the first symbol, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening is triggered. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is “out”, the variable display of the first symbol does not shift to the stop display, and the second skip impossible command is set at that timing to execute the skip impossible effect, If the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening executed next is "big hit" or "small hit", the skip execution command is set (S1505). The skip effect is executed at the timing when the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is started, and the timing when the second symbol shifts to the stop display. When the skip effect ends, the variable display of the first symbol shifts to the stop display.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 17: S406).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S1601, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the start of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

  When it is determined in step S1601 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether the opening/closing process period flag is ON. The open/close processing period flag is turned on at the start of the open/close processing period and turned off at the end of the open/close processing period.

  When it is determined in step S1602 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  In step S1603, when it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S1603: NO), the process proceeds to step S1604, and the timing when the variable display of the symbols on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b is finished. Or not. When it is determined in step S1604 that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S1604: NO), the game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S1604 that it is the timing when the variable display ends (S1604: YES), the process proceeds to step S1605, and the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time corresponds to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine if there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot flag, the 8R regular jackpot flag, the 2R regular jackpot flag, and the jackpot flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1605: NO), this game state transition processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1605 that the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game times corresponds to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. To do. Then, it progresses to step S1607.

  In step S1607, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) or "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To indicating the remaining time of the opening period. The timer counter area To is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area To is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608.

  In step S1608, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This opening command includes information on the set opening time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed. After executing step S1608, the process advances to step S1609 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S1603 that the opening period flag is ON (S1603: YES), the process proceeds to step S1610.

  In step S1610, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter area To is “0”. If it is determined in step S1610 that the opening period has ended (S1610: YES), the flow advances to step S1611 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step S1612.

  In step S1612, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S1612, the process proceeds to step S1613.

  In step S1613, the number of rounds in this open/close execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R regular jackpot flag) and small jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is checked. Are set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened. Details of the round number setting process will be described later. After executing S1613, the process proceeds to step S1614.

  In step S1614, the opening/closing processing command is set. The set open/close processing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 17). This open/close processing command includes information on the number of rounds of the current open/close processing period. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received opening/closing processing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1614, the process proceeds to step S1615.

  In step S1615, the open/close processing period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S1602 that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1616 to execute the special winning opening/closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or more than "1", and the big winning is achieved. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is open, on the condition that the open limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the maximum number of open game balls have entered. The driving state of the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S1616, the process proceeds to step S1617.

  In step S1617, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1617: NO), this game state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1617: YES), the process proceeds to step S1618 and the open/close processing period flag is turned off. After executing step S1618, the process proceeds to step S1619.

  In step S1619, round display end processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S1619, the process proceeds to step S1620.

  In step S1620, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening/closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) or "0" (that is, 0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te indicating the remaining time of the ending period. The timer counter area Te is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area Te is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, every 2 msec cycle. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1620, the process proceeds to step S1621.

  In step S1621, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This ending command includes information on the set ending time. The sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing processing period based on the received ending command, determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending time, and executes the effect of the determined content. Control various equipment. After executing Step S1621, the process proceeds to Step S1622.

  In step S1622, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S1601 that the ending period flag is ON (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1623.

  In step S1623, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S1620) is "0". When it is determined in step S1623 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is “0” (S1623: YES), the process proceeds to step S1624.

  In step S1624, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S1625 to turn off the open/close execution mode flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S1626, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1626, the present game state transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1623 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is not "0" (S1623: NO), the present game state transition processing is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1607) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S1701, it is determined whether the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R regular jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening/closing execution It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a big hit.

  When it is determined in step S1701 that the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, and the trigger to shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 2R normal big hit. It is determined whether there is any. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. After executing step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. Then, this opening time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the trigger for the shift to the current open/close execution mode is not a big hit (S1701: YES), that is, if the trigger for the shift to the current open/close execution mode is a small hit, or When it is determined in step S1702 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is the 2R normal jackpot (S1702: YES), the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In step S1704, "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. That is, when the game ball is entered into the second starting opening 34, the opening/closing execution mode is transitioned this time, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed upon the entry of the game ball is 2R. Usually, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, the opening effect is not substantially performed. After executing step S1704, the present opening time setting process ends.

<Round number setting process>
Next, the round number setting process will be described. The round number setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1613) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the round number setting process. In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R regular jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening/closing execution It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a big hit.

  When it is determined in step S1801 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is the jackpot (S1801: YES), the process proceeds to step S1802, and the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is the 16R certainty jackpot. Determine if there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  In step S1802, when it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, and “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. .. Then, this round number setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not the 16R certainty variation jackpot (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is It is determined whether or not it is the 8R probability variation jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag or the 8R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  When it is determined in step S1804 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 8R certainty variation jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot (S1804: YES), the process proceeds to step S1805, and the first round counter area RC1 displays “8”. ”Is set. Then, this round number setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S1804, when it is determined that the trigger of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the 8R certainty variation jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot (S1804: NO), that is, the trigger of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is 2R. If it is a normal big hit, the process proceeds to step S1806, and “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1. Then, this round number setting process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1801 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (S1801: YES), that is, the opening/closing execution mode this time is triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 34. If the lottery result of the big hit lottery executed upon the entry is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1807, and “1” is set in the first round counter area RC1. Set. Then, this round number setting process is ended.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: 1616) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing process. In step S1901, it is determined whether the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning award driving unit 36c. When it is determined in step S1901 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1902, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". .. When it is determined in step S1902 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1902: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1902 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the special winning opening 36a. The value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1903: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1903: YES), the process proceeds to step S1904, and the variable winning drive unit is opened to open the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Then, it progresses to step S1905.

  In step S1905, a ball entry counter setting process is executed. In the ball entry counter setting process, a value that allows entry of a game ball into the ball entry counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 during one opening of the special winning opening 36a (during one round) is set. set. The details of the entrance counter setting process will be described later. After executing step S1905, the process proceeds to step S1906.

  In step S1906, open limit time setting processing is executed. In the opening limit time setting process, the opening limit time, which is the limit of the opening time of the special winning opening 36a, is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the opening limit time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the special winning opening 36a. As described above, the value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, every 2 msec. Details of the open limit time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1907, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening/closing processing is ended. The opening command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the special winning opening 36a has started, and is a command for normal processing. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are changed to the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of the release. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect content on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed to the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  When it is determined in step S1901 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1908, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1908 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1908: NO), the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1909, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When it is determined in step S1909 that the game ball has not entered (S1909: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that a game ball has entered (S1909: YES), the flow advances to step S1910 to subtract 1 from the value of the entry counter area PC. Then, it progresses to step S1911.

  In step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S1911 that the value of the entry counter area PC is not "0" (S1911: NO), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S1908 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1908: YES), or when it is determined in step S1911 that the value of the entry counter area PC is “0”. (S1911: YES), proceeds to step S1912 and executes a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step S1913.

  In step S1913, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Then, it progresses to step S1914 and it is determined whether the value of the 1st round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1914 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1914: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1914 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1915.

  In step S1915, a closing time setting process is executed. The closing time setting process is a process for setting the closing time of the special winning opening 36a, and specifically, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the special winning opening 36a. In this embodiment, "1000" (2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After executing step S1915, the process proceeds to step S1916.

  In step S1916, a close command is set. After that, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended. The closing command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is completed, and is a command for normal processing. In the output process (FIG. 17: step S402), the sound is emitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round is completed, and the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect content on the liquid crystal display device 41 ends the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did.

<Incoming ball counter setting process>
Next, the entry counter setting process will be described. The game entrance counter setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 31: S1905) of the special winning opening opening/closing process.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the entry counter setting process. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R regular jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening/closing execution It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a big hit.

  When it is determined in step S2001 that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a big hit (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a 2R normal jackpot. Determine if there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  When it is determined in step S2002 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the 2R normal jackpot (S2002: NO), the process proceeds to step S2003, and "10" is set in the entry counter area PC. After that, the main entrance counter setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S2001 that the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not a jackpot (S2001: NO), or in step S2002, the trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a 2R normal jackpot. When it is determined (S2002: YES), the process proceeds to step S2004, and "6" is set in the entry counter area PC. That is, in the case where the current ball entry counter setting process is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry as a trigger is 2R normal. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, “6” is set in the entrance counter area PC. Then, the main entrance counter setting process is ended.

<Opening time limit setting process>
Next, the open limit time setting process setting process will be described. The opening limit time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S1906) of the special winning opening opening/closing process.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening limit time setting process. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R regular jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening/closing execution It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a big hit.

  In step S2101, when it is determined that the trigger of the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the jackpot (S2101: YES), the process proceeds to step S2102, and the trigger of the shift to the switching execution mode of this time is the 2R normal jackpot. Determine if there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  When it is determined in step S2102 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the 2R normal jackpot (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2103, and "15000" is set in the first timer counter area T1 (that is, 30.0 sec). Then, this open limit time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, in step S2101, if it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not the jackpot (S2101: NO), or the trigger for the shift to the switch execution mode this time is the 2R normal jackpot, in step S2102. If it is determined to be (S2102: YES), the flow advances to step S2104 to set "100" (0.2 sec) in the first timer counter area T1. That is, when the opening limit time setting process of this time is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball is 2R normal. When it is a big hit or a small hit, "100" (0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Then, this open limit time setting process ends.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1620) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R regular jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening/closing execution It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a big hit.

  When it is determined in step S2201 that the shift to the current open/close execution mode is a big hit (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the trigger to shift to the open/close execution mode is a 2R normal big hit. Determine if there is. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  When it is determined in step S2202 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not the 2R normal jackpot (S2202: NO), the process proceeds to step S2203, and "3000" is set in the timer counter area Te (that is, 6. 0 sec) is set. After that, the ending time setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S2201 that the trigger for the shift to the current open/close execution mode is not a jackpot (S2201: NO), or the trigger for the shift to the current open/close execution mode is a 2R normal jackpot in step S2202. If so (S2202: YES), the flow advances to step S2204 to set "0" (0.0 sec) in the timer counter area Te. That is, when the ending time setting process of this time is executed with the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game is the 2R normal jackpot. Or, if it is a small hit, "0" (0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. Then, the ending time setting process ends.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 29: S1626) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R certainty variation jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, 2R regular jackpot flag) stored in the RAM 64 is ON, this opening/closing execution It is determined that the trigger for shifting to the mode is a big hit.

  When it is determined in step S2301 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a jackpot (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2302, and the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is a definite jackpot. Or not. Specifically, when either of the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag and the 8R certainty variation jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the certainty variation jackpot.

  When it is determined in step S2302 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variation jackpot (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2302 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not the probability variation jackpot (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2303, the corresponding probability variation jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, the process of turning off the flag that is ON among the 16R probability variation jackpot flag and the 8R probability variation flag is executed. After executing step S2303, the process advances to step S2304.

  In step S2304, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. After executing step S2304, the process advances to step S2305.

  In step S2305, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. The high-probability mode command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306.

  In step S2306, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the transition process at the end of the present ending period ends.

  When it is determined in step S2302 that the trigger for the shift to the opening/closing execution mode this time is not the probability-change big jackpot (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307, and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, the process of turning off the flag that is ON among the 8R normal jackpot flag and the 2R normal jackpot flag is executed. After executing step S2307, the process advances to step S2308.

  In step S2308, the high probability mode flag is turned off. As a result, the winning/winning lottery mode is shifted to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed. After executing step S2308, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  In step S2309, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/loss lot mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step S2309, the process advances to step S2310.

  In step S2310, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S2311, and 100 is set as a counter value in the game number counter PNC. After executing step S2311, the transition process at the end of the present ending period is ended.

  When it is determined in step S2301 that the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is not the big hit (S2301: NO), that is, when the trigger for the shift to the open/close execution mode this time is the jackpot, Proceeding to S2312, the small hit flag is turned off. After executing step S2312, the transition process at the end of the present ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 17: S407).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 44a of the right first starting port 44 is opened, and turned off when it is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S2401 that the in-support flag is not ON (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2402.

  In step S2402, it is determined whether the support winning flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the open state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric role 44a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step S2402 that the support winning flag is not ON (S2402: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S2403 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2403: NO), the main power combination supporting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S2403: YES), the process proceeds to step S2404.

  In step S2404, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S2404 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S2404: YES), the flow advances to step S2405 to set the off display, and then the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2404 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S2404: NO), the process proceeds to step S2406.

  In step S2406, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step S2406 that the value of the number of reserved accessory products SN is "0" (S2406: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, in step S2406, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (S2406: YES), the process proceeds to step S2407.

  In step S2407, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S2408 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step S2407 (S2407: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step S2408 (S2408: YES), the flow advances to step S2409 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, it progresses to step S2410.

  In step S2410, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S2409 is support win. When it is determined in step S2410 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (S2410: YES), the process proceeds to step S2411, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 are provided. “3” is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened. Then, it progresses to step S2412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2410 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (S2410: NO), the process proceeds to step S2412 without executing the process of step S2411.

  In step S2412, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode. When it is determined in step S2412 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode (S2412: YES), the process proceeds to step S2413. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2412 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S2412: NO), the main power combination support process is ended as it is.

  In step S2413, it is determined whether the game number counter area is "0". The game number counter is decremented by 1 each time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S2413 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S2413: NO), the main electric power support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2413 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S2414, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S2415.

  In step S2415, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After that, the processing for supporting electric power roles ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S2415 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 17: step S402) of the normal process. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the process corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S2407 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S2407: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step S2408 (S2408: NO), the process proceeds to step S2416, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Further, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step S2417.

  In step S2417, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S2416 is support win. When it is determined in step S2417 that the support is not won (S2417: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2417 that the support is won (S2417: YES), the process proceeds to step S2418, after the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that the support winning flag is ON (S2402: YES), the flow advances to step S2419 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S2419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2419: NO), the pattern change display in the universal figure unit 38 is being performed, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2419 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S2419: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420.

  In step S2420, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the flow advances to step S2421, and the support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the in-support flag is ON (S2401: YES), the flow advances to step S2422 to execute a power combination opening/closing process for opening/closing the electric accessory 44a. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Opening/closing electric power>
Next, the power combination opening/closing process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2422) of the electric power combination support process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process. In step S2501, it is determined whether the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 44b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is opened (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a. When it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2502: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the main electric opening/closing process ends.

  When it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 44a to be in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S2503, the process proceeds to step S2504.

  In step S2504, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S2505 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S2505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S2505: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2505 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S2505: YES), the process proceeds to step S2506 to turn off the in-support flag. After that, the main power combination opening/closing process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S2501 that the electric accessory 44a is not open (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2507, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S2507 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S2507: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S2507: YES), the process proceeds to step S2508, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step S2509.

  In step S2509, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (S2509: NO), the flow advances to step S2510 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

  If it is determined in step S2510 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S2510: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2511, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power combination opening/closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2509 that it is the open/close execution mode (S2509: YES) or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step S2510 (S2510: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2512, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power combination opening/closing process is ended.

<Game ball launch control processing>
Next, the game ball launch control process will be described. The game ball launch control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 17: S408).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the game ball launch control process. In step S2601, it is determined whether the touch sensor 25a is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the operation handle 25. When it is determined in step S2601 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2601 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S2601: NO), the game ball launch control process is ended.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the game ball firing button 26 is ON. When it is determined in step S2602 that the game ball firing button 26 is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603.

  In step S2603, it is determined whether the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is zero. When it is determined in step S2603 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S2603: YES), the game ball launch control process is ended. When it is determined in step S2603 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S2603: NO), the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, it is determined whether the wait button 25b is ON. When it is determined in step S2604 that the wait button is ON (S2604: YES), the game ball launch control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2604 that the wait button is not ON (S2604: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2605.

  In step S2605, a control signal is transmitted to the firing control device 80 so as to fire a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to the displacement amount (rotational operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity according to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing step S2605, the present game ball firing control processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2602 that the game ball firing button 26 is ON (S2602: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the launch strength for right-handed hitting. In the present embodiment, the control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the same launch strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity according to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. Then, the game ball launch control process is ended.

A5. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, the effect operation buttons 24, the speaker 46, various lamps 47 are connected, and the display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light-side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display-side MPU 102.

A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

  In step S2701, a command storing process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

  In step S2703, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step S2702. After executing step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704.

  In step S2704, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step S2702. After executing step S2704, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 41: S2702).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2801 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (S2801: YES), the flow advances to step S2402 to execute the hold command handling process. In the hold command handling process, based on the received hold command, of the hold information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44) The command for controlling the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 while grasping the number and the determination result of the previous determination process. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2801 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2801: NO), step S2802 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2803.

  In step S2803, it is determined whether the first variation command and the first type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2803 that the first variation command and the first type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (S2803: YES), the flow advances to step S2804 to execute the first starting port command handling process. To do. Details of the first starting port command response processing will be described later. After executing step S2804, the process advances to step S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2803 that the first variation command and the first type command have not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2803: NO), step S2804 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2805.

  In step S2805, it is determined whether the second variation command and the second type command are received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2805 that the second variation command and the second type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (S2805: YES), the flow advances to step S2806 to execute the second starting port command handling process. To do. The details of the second starting port command handling process will be described later. After executing step S2806, the process advances to step S2807. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2805 that the second variation command and the second type command have not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2805: NO), step S2806 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2807.

  In step S2807, it is determined whether the skip execution command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2807 that the skip execution command is received from the main MPU 62 (S2807: YES), the flow advances to step S2808 to execute skip execution command handling processing. Details of the skip execution command handling process will be described later. After executing step S2808, the process advances to step S2809. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2807 that the skip execution command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2807: NO), step S2808 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2809.

  In step S2809, it is determined whether the first skip disable command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2809 that the first skip-disabled command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2809: YES), the flow advances to step S2810 to execute the first skip-disabled command handling process. The details of the first non-skipable command handling process will be described later. After executing step S2810, the process proceeds to step S2811. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2809 that the first skip disable command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2809: NO), step S2809 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2811.

  In step S2811, it is determined whether the second skip disable command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2811 that the second skip-disabled command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S2811: YES), the flow advances to step S2812 to execute the second skip-disabled command handling process. Details of the second non-skipable command handling process will be described later. After executing step S2812, the process advances to step S2813. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2811 that the second skip disable command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2811: NO), step S2812 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2813.

  In step S2813, it is determined whether the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2813 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (S2813: YES), the flow advances to step S2814 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the jackpot type and the opening time included in the opening command received this time are specified, and the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type and the opening time are set and The command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After executing step S2814, the process advances to step S2815. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2813 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (S2813: NO), step S2814 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2815.

  In step S2815, it is determined whether the open/close processing command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2815 that the open/close processing command is received from the main MPU 62 (S2815: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2816 to execute round effect setting processing. In the round effect setting process, the contents of the effect to be executed in the opening/closing process period are set based on the information on the number of rounds and the jackpot type information included in the opening/closing process command, and the information corresponding to the effect contents is set. The generated command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S2816, the process advances to step S2817. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2815 that the opening/closing processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S2815: NO), step S2816 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2817.

  In step S2817, it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S2817 that the ending command has been received (S2817: YES), the flow advances to step S2818 to execute ending effect setting processing. In the ending effect setting process, based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time, the content of the ending effect in the ending period is set, and the command in which the information corresponding to the effect content is set is displayed. It is transmitted to the side MPU 102. After executing step S2818, the process proceeds to step S2819. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2817 that the ending command has not been received (S2817: NO), step S2818 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2819.

  In step S2819, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the high-probability mode command, the low-probability mode command, the opening command, and the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After executing step S2819, the processing corresponding to this command ends.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2802).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

  In step S2901, the update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The 1st reservation number counter area shows the number of reservation information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st starting port (the center side 1st starting port 33 or the right side 1st starting port 44). It is a counter area for specifying in. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. In the following, the number of pieces of suspension information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the center-side first starting opening 33 or the right-side first starting opening 44) is also referred to as “first reserved number”. After executing step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2902.

  The reason why the process of step S2901 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, the power supply is turned on in the situation where the hold information relating to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33 or the right first starting opening 44) is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60. When cut off, the main control device 60 stores and holds the hold information, while the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the hold information is zero. In this case, if the configuration is adopted in which the first hold number counter area is incremented each time the voice light emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the number of hold information actually held and stored in the main control device 60 is increased. Then, there may be a problem that the number of pieces of hold information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 does not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting the configuration in which the information of the contained quantity to be contained is set in the first reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

  In step S2902, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 is determined based on the first hold number information included in the hold command and the determination result of the previous determination process. A command for controlling is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After executing step S2902, the hold command handling process ends.

<Processing for command for first starting opening>
Next, the first starting port command handling process will be described. The first starting port command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2804).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first starting port command handling process. As described above, the first starting port command corresponding process is a process executed when it is determined that the first variation command and the first type command are received, and the first starting port (center side first starting port) It is a process for setting the content of the effect executed at the time of the variable display of the first symbol which is executed upon the entrance of the game ball into the mouth 33 or the first starting opening 44 on the right side. The specific processing of the first starting port command handling processing will be described below.

  In step S3001, the first variation command and the first type command received this time are read out, and the information on the presence/absence of a jackpot, the jackpot type, the presence/absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time are read from the two commands. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step S3002.

  In step S3002, effect type setting processing is executed. In the effect type setting process, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game game are set based on the information read in step S3001. After executing step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, a process for setting the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L Stop The information corresponding to the result is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead of this, the former selects more than the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the “7” symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is the 8R normal jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game time is out of alignment, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is determined from the content of the first variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. After executing step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3004.

  In step S3004, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, information on the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the first variation command received this time, information on the variation time, and information on the liquid crystal design specified in step S3003. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S3004, the process proceeds to step S3005.

  In step S3005, the information of the effect type, the liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game time is set in the first start opening game time effect command. Then, it progresses to step S3006 and transmits the said 1st starting mouth game time production command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the effect contents corresponding to the received first start opening game time effect command. After executing step S3006, the process proceeds to step S3007.

  In step S3007, the pending information update process is executed. In the pending information update processing, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command, and if it is determined that the variation command received this time is the first variation command, the The information in the first reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the first reserved quantity stored in the first reserved quantity counter area of the optical RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing step S3007, the process for responding to the command for the first starting opening is ended.

<Processing for command for second starting opening>
Next, the processing corresponding to the second start port command will be described. The second starting port command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2806).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second starting port command handling process. As described above, the second starting port command corresponding process is a process executed when it is determined that the second variation command and the second type command are received, and the game ball to the second starting port 34 It is a process for setting the content of the effect executed at the time of variable display of the second symbol which is executed upon the entry of a ball. Hereinafter, a specific process of the second starting port command handling process will be described.

  In step S3101, the second variation command and the second type command received this time are read out, and the information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the type of big hit, the presence/absence of a small hit, and the variation time are read from the two commands. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step S3102.

  In step S3102, the process for setting the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is a 2R normal jackpot, the liquid crystal symbol (character) corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot is displayed in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c. The information corresponding to is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery of the game time this time is a small hit or out, in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c, information corresponding to the liquid crystal design (character) corresponding to the small hit or miss. Is set as the information of the liquid crystal design this time. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

  In step S3103, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the second variation command received this time, the information of the variation time, and the information of the liquid crystal design specified in step S3102. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104.

  In step S3104, the information of the effect type, the liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game time is set in the second start opening game time effect command. Then, it progresses to step S3105 and transmits the said 2nd starting mouth game time effect command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the effect contents corresponding to the received second start mouth game time effect command. After executing step S3105, the second start port command handling process is ended.

<Skip execution command processing>
Next, the skip execution command handling process will be described. The skip execution command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2808).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the skip execution command handling process. In step S3201, a skip effect is set. Specifically, the skip effect described in FIG. 11A is set as the effect to be executed. After executing step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202.

  In step S3202, a skip effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received skip effect command. After executing step S3202, the processing corresponding to the skip execution command ends.

<Processing for the first non-skipable command>
Next, the first non-skipable command handling process will be described. The first non-skipable command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2810).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first non-skipable command handling process. In step S3301, the remaining time information of the fluctuation time of the first symbol which is being variably displayed is read. As a specific example using FIG. 12, the time information corresponding to the period from time Tm6 when the variable display of the second symbol starts to time Tm16 when the variable display of the first symbol ends is read. As an actual process, the remaining time information of the timer counter that counts the fluctuation time tc1 which is the fluctuation time of the first symbol is read. After executing step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302.

  In step S3302, it is determined whether the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more. When it is determined in step S3302 that the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more (S3302: YES), the process proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, the big hit skip improper effect is set as an effect to be executed. In this embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13A is set as the effect to be executed. After that, the process advances to step S3304, and a big hit skip improper effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received big-skip non-skipable effect command. After executing step S3303, the first non-skipable command handling process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S3302 that the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is not 5 seconds or more (S3302: NO), the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3305, the jackpot notification effect is set as an effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13B is set as the effect to be executed. Then, it progresses to step S3306 and transmits the jackpot notification production command to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the effect contents corresponding to the received jackpot notification effect command. After executing step S3306, the first non-skipable command handling process is ended.

<Second skip impossible command handling process>
Next, the second non-skipable command handling process will be described. The second non-skipable command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 42: S2812).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the second non-skipable command handling process. In step S3401, the off-skip non-skipable effect is set as the effect to be executed. In this embodiment, the effect described in FIG. 13A is set as the effect to be executed. That is, the big hit skip effect set in step S3304 (FIG. 47) is the same effect as the out-of-skip non-skip effect set in step S3401. By executing the same non-skipable effect at the time of jackpot and at the time of miss, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tension. After executing step S3401, the flow proceeds to step S3402.

  In step S3402, a non-skipable effect command at the time of disconnection is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received non-skipable effect command at the time of detachment. After executing step S3402, the second non-skipable command handling process is ended.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when main commands are repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and until the power is cut off, and when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

  In step S3501, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step S3502.

  In step S3502, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S3601, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified, and then the VDP 105 is rendered and the image is drawn. Execute the display instructions.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

  In step S3701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 50), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the drawing and display control of the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is in the acceptance period of pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is in the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S3701), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the user can quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the liquid crystal design set by the voice emission control device 90, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

  In step S3702, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the liquid crystal display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S3701) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step S3703.

  In step S3703, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S3702), the type of the character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step S3704.

  In step S3704, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S3703), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information and, together with the drive signal, causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3705 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shortens the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time, so the variation time preset in the predetermined game time is changed. When it is long, it is possible to prevent the player's concentration on the game from being interrupted and bored at a predetermined number of game times. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time by executing the process of operating the game ball firing button 26 or rotating the operation handle 25. By allowing the game ball to enter the second starting port 34, it is possible for the player to intentionally urge it, so that the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol is executed by the game player at a desired timing. Can be encouraged. For example, when the player recognizes that a big hit cannot be expected when recognizing the effect being executed during the variable display of the first symbol, and intentionally ends the variable display of the first symbol, intentionally. It is possible to prompt the execution of the process for shortening the variation time of the first symbol, and to end the variable display of the first symbol early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's concentration from becoming discontinuous and boring in each game, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the game ball firing button 26 is provided, the operation that the player should perform in order to promote the execution of the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time. Can be facilitated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 34 is arranged at a position where the game ball enters when the operation handle 25 is rotated by the player so that the launch strength of the game ball becomes the maximum strength. Therefore, the player can insert the game ball into the second starting opening 34 by the easy operation of the operation handle 25. That is, the player can intentionally insert the game ball into the second starting opening 34 by the easy turning operation of the operation handle 25, and as a result, the variation time of the first symbol is set in advance. The player can intentionally urge the execution of the processing to be shortened to a time shorter than the variable time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, based on the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the combination of the second symbols to be stopped and displayed. , It is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time. Therefore, for example, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 34 while the first symbol is changing, the first symbol is displayed together with the stop display of the second symbol. By recognizing whether or not the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation and playability different from those of the conventional game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, in the win/loss table for the second starting opening, the probability of being a big hit or a small hit is high in both the win/loss table for low probability and the win/loss table for high probability. , Higher than the probability of being missed. That is, when the second symbol starts the variable display after the first symbol starts the variable display, the process of shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variable time is executed. The probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination is higher than the probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination in which the process of shortening the fluctuation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time is not executed. high. Therefore, with a high probability, it is possible to execute the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a so-called holding function for holding the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 during the period in which the second symbol is variably displayed. I don't. Therefore, the player can easily control the timing of starting the variable display of the second symbol. As a result, the player can easily control the timing of executing the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the second symbol in the case of "small hit" in the big hit lottery executed upon entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is all 1 second and The expected value of the variation time of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the expected value of the variation time of the first symbol. Therefore, even when the second symbol starts the variable display after the first symbol starts the variable display, the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time Can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second starting port 34 is arranged upstream of the first starting port (the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44) in the direction in which the game balls flow down. There is. Therefore, it is possible to make a state in which the game ball enters the first starting opening (the center side first starting opening 33, the right side first starting opening 44) but does not enter the second starting opening 34. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally executing the process of shortening the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time, the stop display suggesting that the first symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. Since the skip effect is executed as the effect, the player can recognize that the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the first symbol starts the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display, and the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time. When the time is not shortened, since the non-skipable effect is executed, the player can be made aware that the fluctuation time of the first symbol is not shortened to a time shorter than the preset fluctuation time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the first symbol starts the variable display, the second symbol starts the variable display, and the variation time of the first symbol is shorter than the preset variation time. When the time is not shortened, the effect to be executed is selected according to the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol. Specifically, as described in step S3302, when the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is 5 seconds or more, a big hit skip impossible effect is executed, and the variation time of the first symbol remains. When the time is less than 5 seconds, the jackpot notification effect is executed, so it is possible to execute an effect according to the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to add intonation to the game, and thus the player. Can give a sense of expectation and tension.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The difference between the second embodiment and the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol is variably displayed. The point is that the variable display of the first symbol is not started when the second symbol is variably displayed. Other points are the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 52 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In this example, the case where the game ball enters the second starting port 34 before the game ball enters the central first starting port 33 will be described.

  When the player starts operating the operation handle 25 at time Tm1, the game ball launching mechanism 81 launches a game ball into the game area PA. In this example, the player adjusts the turning operation amount of the operation handle 25 so as to insert the game ball into the first start opening 33 on the center side.

  After that, at time Tm2, the player operates the game ball firing button 26 before the game ball enters the central first start opening 33 by the operation of the operation handle 25 to shoot the game ball. By the operation of the game ball firing button 26 by the player, the game ball enters the second starting port 34, and the detection sensor for the second starting port detects the entering of the game ball at time Tm3. After that, the game ball enters the center side first starting opening 33, and at time Tm4, the detection sensor for the first starting opening detects the entering of the game ball.

  By entering the game ball into the second starting port 34, the second symbol display portion 37b, from time Tm5 to time Tm6, that is, after the variable time tc1, during the variable display of the second symbol, The second symbol is stopped and displayed. The result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired when the game ball enters the second start opening this time is assumed to be "small hit".

  At this time, at time Tm4, the second symbol is detected despite the fact that the detection sensor for the first starting opening detects the entering of the playing ball by entering the playing ball into the center side first starting opening 33. During the fluctuation time tc1 in which the variable symbol is displayed, the first symbol display portion 37a does not start the variable symbol display of the first symbol, and the variable symbol is displayed from the time Tm7 after the second symbol is stopped and displayed. Start. In addition, in this example, the result of the jackpot lottery executed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the entrance of the game ball into the first starting opening is “out”. Therefore, at the same time that the variable display of the first symbol is started, the pachinko machine 10 starts the effect for the first symbol for disengagement.

  When the player who recognizes that the variable display of the first symbol and the effect for the first symbol for disengagement are started operates the game ball firing button 26 at time Tm8, the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on is set. As a result, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the game area PA. At time Tm8, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 and the game ball shot in the game area PA enters the second starting port 34, at time Tm9, the detection sensor for the second starting port plays the game. Detects ball entry. When the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are acquired, and at time Tm10, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol. The variable display of is started.

  From the time Tm10 to the time Tm11, that is, the variation time tc4 (1 second in the present embodiment), the second symbol display unit 37b variably displays the second symbol, and then displays the second symbol. Stop display.

  At this time, similarly to the first embodiment, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a that was displaying the variation is the first symbol even though the initially set variation time tc2 has not elapsed. At the timing (time Tm11) when the second symbol of the 2 symbol display portion 37b displays the stop, the first symbol shifts from the variable display to the stop display. As a result, the first symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b are stopped and displayed almost at the same time. Then, at time Tm12, the variable winning device is opened once when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting opening 34 is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, details of specific processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the specific processing, the difference from the first embodiment is the content of the processing in the variation start processing for the first starting port (FIG. 19), and other specific processing is the first embodiment. Is the same as. Therefore, in this description, the variation start process for the first starting port will be described, and the description of other specific processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the variation start processing for the first starting opening in the second embodiment. The variation start process for the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S503) of the game time control process.

  The difference between the variation start process for the first starting port in the second embodiment and the variation start process for the first starting port in the first embodiment is that in the variation starting process for the first starting port in the second embodiment. The point is that it is determined in step S3802 whether the second changing flag is ON. The other processing contents are the same as the processing contents of the variation start processing for the first starting port in the first embodiment.

  In the variation start process for the first starting opening in the second embodiment, it is determined in step S3802 whether the second variation flag is ON, and if it is determined that the second variation flag is not ON, (S3802: NO) The process proceeds to step S3803, and when it is determined that the second fluctuation flag is ON (S3802: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first starting opening is ended. That is, when it is determined that the second changing flag is ON, the fluctuation starting process for the first starting opening is performed without executing the process for starting fluctuation of the first symbol (steps S3803 to S3810). finish.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the first symbol is variably displayed by determining whether or not the second varying flag is ON in step S3802 of the variation starting process for the first starting opening. Even if the variable display of the second symbol is started in this case, a process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol is being variable displayed is realized.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first symbol is variably displayed and the second symbol is variably displayed, the second symbol is variably displayed. Since the variable display of the first symbol is not started, the first starting opening (center side first starting opening 33, right side first starting opening 44) is entered into the first starting opening in spite of the game ball entering the ball. It is possible to avoid an event in which a big hit lottery is not triggered when a game ball is entered. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. This will be specifically described below.

  In the first embodiment and the present embodiment, as can be seen from the processing of step S801 of the determination processing for the first starting opening (FIG. 21), the first starting opening after the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 When the game ball is entered to the second start opening 34, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 is “big hit” or “small hit”, the second hit Since the flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816, and the stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. Therefore, despite the game ball entering the first starting opening, the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening is not executed.

  That is, in the first embodiment, when the first symbol starts the variable display when the second symbol is variably displayed, the second symbol is a trigger to start the variable display. When the lottery result of the big hit lottery based on the ball entering the starting opening 34 is "big hit" or "small hit", even if the first symbol starts the variable display during the variable display of the second symbol. The jackpot lottery based on the entry into the first starting opening that triggers the variable display of the first symbol is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the variable display of the first symbol is not started when the second symbol is variably displayed, the first starting port (the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port) It is possible to avoid an event in which a big hit lottery is not performed when a game ball is entered in 44) but the first start opening is used as a trigger, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. ..

C. Third embodiment:
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, although the variable display of the second symbol is started when the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol is displayed when the second symbol is variably displayed. Although the process which does not start the variable display of the symbols is realized, in the third embodiment, when the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second symbol of the second symbol to be stopped and displayed by the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed. Only when the combination is a combination corresponding to the “big hit” or the “small hit” in the big hit lottery, the process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol is realized. By doing this, the game ball enters the first starting opening despite the game ball entering the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33, the right first starting opening 44). The same effect as that of the second embodiment of avoiding the event that the jackpot lottery is not triggered by the above is achieved, and the variable display of the first symbol is started at a higher frequency as compared with the second embodiment. can do.

  Hereinafter, details of the specific processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the specific processing, the difference from the second embodiment is the content of the processing in the fluctuation start processing for the first starting opening (FIG. 53), and other specific processing is the first embodiment. And it is the same as the second embodiment. Therefore, in this description, the variation start process for the first starting port will be described, and the description of other specific processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the first starting port in the third embodiment. The variation start process for the first starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S503) of the game time control process.

  The difference between the variation start process for the first starting port in the third embodiment and the variation start process for the first starting port in the second embodiment is that in the variation starting process for the first starting port in the third embodiment. The point is that it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the second hit flag is ON. The other processing contents are the same as the processing contents of the variation start processing for the first starting port in the second embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, in step S3902, as in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second changing flag is ON. When it is determined that the second changing flag is not ON (S3902: NO), the process proceeds to step S3904.

  If it is determined in step S3902 that the second changing flag is ON (S3902: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3903 and it is determined whether the second hit flag is ON. When it is determined that the second hit flag is not ON (S3903: NO), the process proceeds to step S3904.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3903 that the second hit flag is ON (S3903: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first starting opening is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation flag is ON in step S3902 of the fluctuation starting process for the first starting opening, and step S3903 of the fluctuation starting process for the first starting opening is performed. By determining whether or not the second hit flag is ON in the case where the second symbol is variably displayed, the second symbol combination that the second symbol display portion 37b stops and displays is Only in the case of a combination corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit" in the big hit lottery, a process of not starting the variable display of the first symbol is realized.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the second symbol is variably displayed, the second symbol combination stopped and displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b is “big hit” in the jackpot lottery. ] Or "small hit" only in the case of a combination corresponding to the start of the variable display of the first symbol, the first starting port (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) game ball The second embodiment has the same effect as that of the second embodiment of avoiding the event that the jackpot lottery is not carried out when the game ball is entered into the first starting opening despite the fact that Compared with the embodiment, the variable display of the first symbol can be started with high frequency.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is provided with a configuration for detecting abnormality or fraud. Specifically, when the player operates the operation handle 25 to maximize the amount of rotation, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball launch mechanism 81 launches the game ball. It is determined whether or not the game ball has normally entered the second starting opening 34.

  In this embodiment, when the player operates the operation handle 25 so that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximized, or the game ball firing button 26, provided that the non-electric accessory 34a is in the open state. When is operated, it is determined whether or not the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 has entered the second starting opening 34 within 2 seconds.

  Then, when the player operates the operation handle 25 so as to maximize the amount of rotational operation, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is When the event of not entering the second starting opening 34 within two seconds occurs five times in a row, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, it is determined that the abnormality has occurred even when the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state despite the game ball entering the second starting port 34.

  By making such a determination, an abnormality such as a foreign object being present on the path through which the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the non-electric accessory 34a passes and the game ball does not normally flow, or an operation handle operated by the player An abnormality such that the firing control device 80 does not normally control the firing intensity even though the turning operation amount of 25 is operated to be the maximum, or the game ball firing button 26 is operated. Despite the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state and the player is in an illegally advantageous state, or the player does not operate by some operation. It is possible to detect a fraudulent act or the like such that the closing of the accessory 34a is hindered.

  Hereinafter, details of specific processing for detecting the above-mentioned abnormality and fraud will be described. It should be noted that in the present description, only processes different from those in the first embodiment will be described, and description of processes that are the same as those in the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a normal process (main control) executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The difference between the normal processing in the present embodiment and the normal processing in the first embodiment (FIG. 17) is that the processing content of the game ball launch control processing (S4008) executed as a subroutine and the abnormality detection processing are newly added. It was added. Other processing contents in the normal processing are the same as those in the first embodiment. The abnormality detection processing in step S4009 is processing for detecting abnormality or fraud in the pachinko machine 10, as described above.

  FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the game ball launch control process in the fourth embodiment. The game ball firing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 55: S4008). The difference between the game ball launch control process of this embodiment and the game ball launch control process of the first embodiment is that the process of step S4106 and the process of step S4108 are newly added in this embodiment. That is. Hereinafter, the game ball launch control process in this embodiment will be described in order from the beginning of the process.

  When it is determined in step S4101 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S4101: YES), the process proceeds to step S4102. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4101 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S4101: NO), the game ball launch control process is ended.

  In step S4102, it is determined whether the game ball firing button 26 is ON. When it is determined in step S4102 that the game ball firing button 26 is not ON (S4102: NO), the process proceeds to step S4103.

  In step S4103, it is determined whether the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is zero. When it is determined in step S4103 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S4103: YES), the game ball launch control process is ended. When it is determined in step S4103 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S4103: NO), the process proceeds to step S4104.

  In step S4104, it is determined whether the wait button 25b is ON. When it is determined in step S4104 that the wait button is ON (S4104: YES), the present game ball launch control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the wait button is not ON (S4104: NO), the flow proceeds to step S4105.

  In step S4105, a control signal is transmitted to the firing control device 80 so as to fire the game ball with the firing strength according to the displacement amount (rotation operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity according to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing step S4105, the process proceeds to step S4106.

  In step S4106, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 25 is the maximum. When it is determined in step S4106 that the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 25 is not the maximum (S4106: NO), the game ball launch control process is ended. If it is determined in step S4106 that the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum (S4106: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4108.

  On the other hand, in 4102, when it is determined that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S4102: YES), the process proceeds to step S4107. In step S4107, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the launch strength for right-handed hitting. In the present embodiment, the control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the same launch strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity according to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. Then, the game ball launch control process is ended. After executing step S4107, the process proceeds to step S4108.

  In step S4108, the maximum firing intensity flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The maximum firing strength flag is a flag that is turned ON when a control signal is transmitted so as to fire the game ball at the maximum firing strength. After executing step S4108, the present game ball firing control processing is ended.

  Next, the abnormality detection process (main control) will be described.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the abnormality detection process. The abnormality detection process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 55: S4009). Further, as described above, the abnormality detection process is a process newly added in the fourth embodiment.

  In step S4201, it is determined whether the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 has performed a reset operation for resetting the abnormality detection. Specifically, it is determined whether the reset button for resetting the abnormality detection is operated by the administrator. When it is determined in step S4201 that the reset operation has not been performed (S4201: NO), the process proceeds to step S4202.

  In step S4202, it is determined whether the abnormality detection start flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The abnormality detection start flag is a flag that is turned on when the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch strength, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 is sent to the second starting opening 34. It is used to determine whether to enter a ball within a predetermined time. When it is determined in step S4202 that the abnormality detection start flag is not ON (S4202: NO), the process proceeds to step S4203.

  In step S4203, it is determined whether the non-electric accessory 34a is in the open state. Specifically, the open/close detection sensor provided in the non-electrical accessory 34a detects the open or closed state of the non-electrical accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S4203 that the non-electric accessory 34a is not in the open state (S4203: NO), the abnormality detection process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4203 that the non-electric accessory 34a is in the open state (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204.

  In step S4204, it is determined whether or not the maximum firing intensity flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S4204 that the maximum emission intensity flag is not ON (S4204: NO), this abnormality detection process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4204 that the maximum emission intensity flag is ON (S4204: YES), the process proceeds to step S4205.

  In step S4205, it is detected whether or not a game ball has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a launch rail for supplying a game ball to the game ball launching mechanism 81. Further, on the launch rail, a launch ball detection sensor for detecting a game ball is provided. The launch ball detection sensor is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and detects a launch ball in a situation where the game ball is held by a holding member that holds the game ball immediately before launch in the game ball launching mechanism 81. A HI level signal is output as a signal, and a LOW level signal is output as a shot ball detection signal in a situation where the game ball is not held by the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the game ball has been supplied on the launch rail and that the supplied game ball has been launched by the launch ball detection sensor. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launch ball detection sensor is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method. In step S4205, when it is detected that the game ball has been emitted from the game ball emitting mechanism 81 (S4205: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4206.

  In step S4206, abnormality detection time setting processing is executed. Specifically, the timer counter Td is set to 1000 (2.0 sec). The abnormality detection time setting process is a process of determining a threshold value (Td) of a required time until the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch strength and enters the second starting opening 34. In the process described below, if the required time is equal to or more than the threshold value, the value of the detection counter Cd described later is incremented by 1. In the present embodiment, 2 seconds is set as the threshold (Td). That is, when the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch strength and to enter the second starting port 34 is 2 seconds or more, the value of the detection counter Cd is incremented by 1. After executing step S4206, the process advances to step S4207.

  In step S4207, the abnormality detection start flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step S4207, the abnormality detection processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S4202 that the abnormality detection start flag is ON (S4202: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4208. In step S4208, it is determined whether the timer counter Td is 0. When it is determined in step S4208 that the timer counter Td is not 0 (S4208: NO), the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting opening 34. When it is determined in step S4209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (S4209: NO), this abnormality detection process ends. When it is determined in step S4209 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (S4209: YES), the process proceeds to step S4210.

  In step S4210, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to 0. The detection counter Cd is a counter that increments the value by 1 when the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch strength and to enter the second starting opening 34 is 2 seconds or more. .. When the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch strength and to enter the second starting port 34 is less than 2 seconds, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to zero. After executing step S4210, the process proceeds to step S4211.

  In step S4211, it is determined whether the non-electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. When it is determined in step S4211 that the non-electric accessory 34a is in the closed state (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212.

  In step S4212, the abnormality detection start flag and the maximum intensity emission flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 are turned off. After executing step S4212, the present abnormality detection processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S4208 that the timer counter Td is 0 (S4208: YES), the process proceeds to step S4213. In step S4213, the value of the detection counter Cd is incremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step S4214.

  In step S4214, it is determined whether the value of the detection counter Cd is 5. When it is determined in step S4214 that the value of the detection counter Cd is not 5 (S4214: NO), this abnormality detection process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4211 that the non-electric accessory 34a is not in the closed state (S4211: NO), or if it is determined in step S4214 that the detection counter Cd is 5 (S4214: YES), step It advances to S4215. That is, if the non-electric accessory 34a does not close despite the game ball entering the second starting port 34, or the game ball is fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch strength, the second starting port In the case where the time required to enter the ball 34 is 2 seconds or more, but the number of occurrences is five consecutive times, the process proceeds to step S4215.

  In step S4215, an abnormality occurrence command is set. The abnormality occurrence command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that an abnormality has occurred, and by the command output process of normal processing (FIG. 17: step S402), It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S4215, the process advances to step S4212 to turn off the abnormality detection start flag and the maximum intensity emission flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing step S4212, the present abnormality detection processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S4201 that the reset operation has been performed (S4201: YES), the process proceeds to step S4216. In step S4216, the value of the detection counter Cd is reset to 0. Then, this abnormality detection processing is ended.

  Next, the command handling process (voice emission control) will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 41: S2702).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. The difference between the command handling processing in the fourth embodiment and the command handling processing in the first embodiment is that step S4319 and step S4320, which are processing relating to an abnormal command, are added to the command handling processing in the fourth embodiment. It is a point. The other processes in the command handling process are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore their explanations are omitted.

  In step S4319, it is determined whether or not the always-occurring command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S4319 that the abnormality occurrence command has been received (S4319: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4320.

  In step S4320, abnormality occurrence command handling processing is executed. Specifically, by operating the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, and the liquid crystal display device 41, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. After executing step S4320, the process advances to step S4321 to execute other setting processing. After that, the processing corresponding to this command ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4319 that the abnormality occurrence command has not been received (S4319: NO), step S4320 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S4321. In the fourth embodiment, the command handling process is executed in this way.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is operated by the player so that the turning operation amount of the operation handle 25 is maximized, or the game ball launch button 26 is operated. In addition, when the event that the game ball emitted from the game ball emitting mechanism 81 does not enter the second starting opening 34 within 5 seconds occurs five times in a row, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, it is determined that the abnormality has occurred even when the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state despite the game ball entering the second starting port 34.

  By making such a determination, an abnormality such as a foreign object being present on the path through which the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the non-electric accessory 34a passes and the game ball does not normally flow, or an operation handle operated by the player An abnormality such that the firing control device 80 does not normally control the firing intensity even though the turning operation amount of 25 is operated to be the maximum, or the game ball firing button 26 is operated. Despite the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the non-electric accessory 34a does not shift to the closed state and the player is in an illegally advantageous state, or the player does not operate by some operation. It is possible to detect a fraudulent act or the like such that the closing of the accessory 34a is hindered.

  In the present embodiment, when the player operates the operation handle 25 so as to maximize the amount of turning operation, or when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball launch mechanism 81 moves from the game ball launch mechanism 81. When the game ball that was fired did not enter the second starting port 34 within 2 seconds and occurred five times in a row, it was determined that an abnormality had occurred, but it was fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81. It may be determined that an abnormality has occurred if the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34 within 2 seconds once. In this case, fraud and abnormality can be detected early. Further, the number of continuation of the event in which the game ball shot from the game ball launch mechanism 81 does not enter the second starting opening 34 within 2 seconds as a threshold value for determining an abnormality is limited to 5 times or 1 time. It can be set to an arbitrary number without being processed.

  Although the value of the timer counter Td is set to 2 seconds in the present embodiment, another value may be set. For example, in the normal state of the pachinko machine 10, the timer is based on the maximum value that can be taken as the time required for the game ball to be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with the maximum launch intensity and to enter the second starting opening 34. The counter Td can be set.

E. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example.

E1. Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, when the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 34 during the period in which the first symbol is variably displayed, the variation time of the first symbol is shortened and the first symbol is stopped and displayed. You may perform guidance production which guides that there is a possibility. For example, the guide effect may be executed as a demonstration moving image that is an effect that is performed during a period in which the game is not executed, or may be executed as a game time effect that is executed during the variable display of the first symbol. .. By executing the guidance effect as described above, when the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 34 during the period in which the first symbol is variably displayed, the variation time of the first symbol is shortened and the first symbol is reduced. It is possible to let the player recognize that the symbol of #1 may be stopped and displayed, and at the same time, let the player recognize the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10.

E2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is set to only the 2R normal jackpot, but the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot. Other jackpot types may be set, or a plurality of these jackpot types may be set. Further, in the first embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode of the variable winning device 36 in the 2R normal jackpot is the low frequency winning mode, but it may be set to the high frequency winning mode, or a plurality of jackpot types. It may be set, and each jackpot type may be combined with a high-frequency winning mode or a low-frequency winning mode to give different degrees of advantage to the player for each jackpot type.

E3. Modification 3:
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4B, the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b is displayed relatively larger than the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c, but the size of these areas is large. A configuration in which the angle changes may be adopted. For example, when the first symbol and the second symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, the size of at least one of the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b and the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c is set in each area. It may be determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery shown by the displayed liquid crystal design. That is, it is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33, the right first starting opening 44) and the second starting opening 34. May be.

  More specifically, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening (the central first start opening 33, the right first start opening 44). However, when it is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b is displayed larger than the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is the first starting opening. When it is more advantageous to the player than the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the (center-side first starting port 33, the right-side first starting port 44) May display the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c larger than the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b.

  By doing so, for the player who recognizes the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a, the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to each symbol and the degree of advantage to the player Can be guessed, and the player can be given a sense of expectation and tenseness.

  In addition, since the liquid crystal symbol display area corresponding to the jackpot lottery of the player's advantage is displayed larger than the other liquid crystal symbol display area, the player's advantageous jackpot lottery It is possible to pay attention to the liquid crystal design corresponding to, and to give a sense of expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

E4. Modification 4:
In the first embodiment, as shown in step S801 of the determination process (FIG. 21) for the first starting opening, when the second hit flag is ON (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S816. As a process of setting the stop symbol of the first symbol, a stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. That is, when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 first, and then the game ball enters the first starting port (the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44). , If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 is a big hit or a small hit, the first start opening (the central side first start opening 33, the right side first) The winning symbol determination of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the 1 start opening 44) is not executed, and the stop symbol setting process for removal is executed.

  Therefore, as the present modification, the game ball enters the second starting port 34 first, and then the game ball enters the first starting port (the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44). Only when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a big hit, the first starting opening (the central side first starting opening 33, the right side first opening) The jackpot lottery winning/non-judgment determination when the game ball enters the starting opening 44) is not executed. That is, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a small hit, the first starting opening (the central side first starting opening 33, the right side first starting opening) It is configured such that the winning determination of the jackpot lottery is executed when the game ball enters in 44). Hereinafter, the determination process for the first starting port according to Modification 4 will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting opening in the fourth modification. The difference between the determination process for the first starting port in the present modification and the determination process for the first starting port in the first embodiment is that the determination process for the first starting port in the present modification is step S801a. Is added. In the determination process for the first starting opening in the modified example 4, it is determined that the second hit flag is ON in step S801 (S801: YES), and if the small hit flag is ON (S801a : YES), and the processing after step S802 is executed.

  As described in the first embodiment, the second hit flag is ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a big hit or a small hit. Is a flag. The small hit flag is a flag which is turned on when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a small hit.

  Therefore, in the determination process for the first starting opening in the present modification, if the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a small hit, the first starting It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning/non-winning determination of the jackpot lottery is executed when the game ball enters the mouth (the first start opening 33 on the center side, the first start opening 44 on the right side).

  When the determination process for the first starting opening in this modified example is adopted, the jackpot when the game ball enters the first starting opening (the central first starting opening 33, the right first starting opening 44) If the lottery result of the lottery is a big hit and the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a small hit, the step of the game state transition process (FIG. 29) In S1605, in determining whether or not to shift to the open/close execution mode, it is necessary to perform a process of determining which lottery result is used to shift to the open/close execution mode. Therefore, for example, you may decide to shift to the opening/closing execution mode by using the lottery result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry into the starting opening of the one in which the variation of the symbol ends first. At the same time, the jackpot flag or the jackpot flag based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that does not trigger the opening/closing execution mode is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to realize the determination process for the first starting opening in the present modification.

E5. Modification 5:
In the variable time setting process (FIG. 22) for the first starting port of the first embodiment, in determining the variable time of the first symbol, by executing step S902 and step S904, the first start It was decided based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth (the center side first starting port 33, the right side first starting port 44), and the entry into the second starting port 34 The variation time of the first symbol may be determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the ball.

  Specifically, the determination process of whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is a big hit, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The determination process of whether or not the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the ball is a small hit is added to the setting process of the variation time for the first starting opening, and the first starting opening (the center-side first starting opening 33, The variation time for each combination of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry to the right first start opening 44) and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34 This modified example can be realized by setting a table.

E6. Modification 6:
In the first embodiment, the skip command setting process (FIG. 28) is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60, but may be executed by the sound light MPU 92 of the audio emission controller 90. In this case, the sound-light side MPU 92 may acquire the information necessary for the determination processing in steps S1501, S1502, and S1504 from the main control device 60 and use it in each determination processing. With such a configuration, the process corresponding to the skip command setting process can be executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

E7. Modification 7:
In the above embodiment, the first fluctuation stop process has the processing mode shown in FIG. 23, and the second fluctuation stop process has the processing mode shown in FIG. 27. However, even if other processing modes are adopted as these two processing modes. Good.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first variation stop processing in the modified example 7. Further, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the second variation stop processing in the modified example 7.

  The difference between the first fluctuation stop process in the present modification and the first fluctuation stop process in the first embodiment is that in the present modification, the process of stopping the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit as step S1011 and step S1012. As a result, a process of turning off the second changing flag is added.

  Further, the difference between the second fluctuation stop process in the present modification and the second fluctuation stop process in the first embodiment is that in the present modification, the process of stopping the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit as step S1411, The point that a process of turning off the first changing flag is added as step S1412 is added.

  If such a processing mode is adopted, when the process of stopping the first symbol and the second symbol at the same time is executed, the process of stopping the first symbol and the process of stopping the second symbol are performed. Since it is executed as a series of processes in the same thread, it is possible to stop the first symbol and the second symbol at the same time more accurately.

E8. Modification 8:
In the first embodiment, the game time control process has the process mode shown in FIG. 18, but other process modes may be adopted as the game time control process.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the game number control process in Modification 8. In the game time control process in the modified example 8, the subroutine of the first fluctuation stop process (FIG. 18: S504) and the second fluctuation stop process (FIG. 18: S507) executed in the game time control process of the first embodiment are executed. As shown in FIG. 62, the function corresponding to the processing including the two subroutines, that is, the subroutine, is executed by one subroutine as the variation stop processing in step S508. By doing so, simplification of the processing can be realized.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a variation stop process (FIG. 62: S508) which is a subroutine of the game number control process in this modification. The fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S4401, it is determined whether the first changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the first symbol is being variably displayed. When it is determined in step S4401 that the first changing flag is ON (S4401: YES), the process proceeds to step S4402.

  In step S4402, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display portion 37a has ended. In step S4402, when it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display unit 37a has ended (S4402: YES), the process proceeds to step S4403, and the first symbol display unit 37a displays The fluctuation of the symbol of 1 is stopped. Then, it progresses to step S4404.

  In step S4404, the first changing flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S4405 and it is determined whether the 1st hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the first symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S4405 that the first hit flag is ON (S4406: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4406.

  In step S4406, the first hit flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S4407.

  In step S4407, it is determined whether the second changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the second symbol is being variably displayed. When it is determined in step S4407 that the second changing flag is ON (S4407: YES), the process proceeds to step S4408. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4407 that the second fluctuation flag is not ON (S4407: NO), this fluctuation stop processing is ended.

  In step S4408, the fluctuation of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S4409, and the second changing flag is turned off. After executing step S4409, the present fluctuation stop processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4401 that the first changing flag is not ON (S4401: NO), in step S4402, if the first symbol display variation display time of the first symbol display unit 37a has not ended. If it is determined (S4402: NO), or if it is determined in step S4405 that the first hit flag is not ON (S4405: NO), the process proceeds to step S4410.

  In step S4410, it is determined whether the second changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the second symbol is being variably displayed. When it is determined in step S4410 that the second changing flag is ON (S4410: YES), the process proceeds to step S4411.

  In step S4411, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. In step S4411, when it is determined that the variation time of the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display unit 37b has ended (S4411: YES), the process proceeds to step S4412, and the second symbol display unit 37b displays the second symbol. Stop the fluctuation of the symbol of 2. Then, it progresses to step S4413.

  In step S4413, the second changing flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S4414, and it is determined whether or not the second hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the second symbol is a jackpot or a jackpot. When it is determined in step S4414 that the second hit flag is ON (S4414: YES), the process proceeds to step S4415.

  In step S4415, the second hit flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S4416.

  In step S4416, it is determined whether the first changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the first symbol is being variably displayed. If it is determined in step S4416 that the first changing flag is ON (S4416: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4417. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4416 that the first in-fluctuation flag is not ON (S4416: NO), the present variation stop processing ends.

  In step S4417, the variation of the first symbol displayed by the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S4418, and the first changing flag is turned off. After executing step S4418, the present fluctuation stop process ends.

  When it is determined in step S4410 that the second changing flag is not ON (S4410: NO), it is determined in step S4411 that the change display time of the second symbol in the second symbol display portion 37b has not ended. In the case (S4411: NO), or when it is determined in step S4414 that the second hit flag is not ON (S4414: NO), this fluctuation stop process ends.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the first variation stop processing is the determination processing as to whether or not the variation time of the first symbol ends, and the determination processing as to whether or not the variation time of the second symbol ends. (FIG. 18: S504) and each of the second fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 18: S507) are executed once. As in this modification, the subroutine of the first variation stop processing (FIG. 18: S504) and the subroutine of the second variation stop processing (FIG. 18: S507) that were executed in the game time control processing of the first embodiment are executed. , By executing in one subroutine as the fluctuation stop process, the determination whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol, which has been executed in each process of the first fluctuation stop process and the second fluctuation stop process, ends, The determination as to whether or not the variation time of the symbol 2 is finished only needs to be performed once in the variation stop processing, and the processing can be simplified.

E9. Modification 9:
In the above embodiment, the skip effect and the non-skipable effect are executed, but various other effects may be executed. For example, a skip promotion effect that urges the player to shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset variation time by inserting a game ball into the second starting opening 34 may be executed. ..

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the skip promotion effect. The skip promotion effect in the present embodiment can shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time by displaying the character "Skip!" on the display surface 41a. It is a production that suggests that there is a nature. By executing such an effect, the player is prompted to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 34 and shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time. By executing the skip promotion effect while the first symbol is changing display, the game ball firing button 26 is operated, or the operation handle 25 is operated with the maximum amount of turning operation, so that the second start opening 34 is played. The player can be prompted to enter the ball.

E10. Modification 10:
In the above embodiment, the skip effect and the non-skipable effect are executed, but various other effects may be executed. For example, the skip suppression effect described below may be executed.

  When the player operates the game ball launch button 26 when the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is short, the variation of the second symbol due to the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 by the operation. The display and the stop display may be executed at the time of the variable display of the first symbol which is executed next to the variable display of the first symbol which is currently in progress. In this case, reduction of the variation time for the variable display of the first symbol which is currently in progress is not executed, but reduction of the variation time for the variable display of the first symbol to be executed next time can be performed. There is a possibility that the shortening of the variation time of the first symbol may be executed at a timing not intended by the player.

  Therefore, it is the timing after the first symbol starts the variable display by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the remaining time of the variable time of the preset first symbol is preset. At the timing when it becomes shorter than the time tl as the threshold value, it is suggested that it is better not to let the game ball enter the second starting opening 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol for the player. A skip suppression effect that is an effect to be performed may be executed.

  As the time tl set as the threshold value, for example, the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 from the time when the player operates the game ball launch button 26 (for example, time Tm7 in FIG. 10). Is a small hit, and a time length (hereinafter, also referred to as time tla) corresponding to the time until the operation of the variable winning device 36 is started (for example, time Tm11 in FIG. 10) can be applied. That is, it is the timing after the first symbol starts the variable display due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the remaining time of the preset variable time of the first symbol is shorter than the time tla. The skip suppression effect is executed when the timing is reached.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the skip suppression effect. The skip suppression effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that the female character should not let the game ball enter the second starting opening 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol.

  In this way, by executing the skip suppression effect, by inserting the game ball into the second starting opening 34 during the variable display of the first symbol which is currently in progress, the first executed next time. It is possible to prevent the variation time for the variable display of the symbols from being reduced, and to prevent the variation time of the first symbol from being reduced at a timing not intended by the player.

  In the above description, by executing the skip suppression effect, the player is suppressed from entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol, It is also possible to realize the effect of the skip suppression effect by the skip promotion effect described in Modification 9 above.

  Specifically, the skip promotion effect is repeatedly executed at the timing when the first symbol starts the variable display due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening. Then, when the remaining time of the preset variable time of the first symbol is shorter than the time tl as the preset threshold value, the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is stopped. It was urged to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 34 by repeatedly executing the skip promotion effect and to shorten the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the preset variation time. Despite this, when the execution of the skip promotion effect is suddenly stopped, the player inserts a game ball into the second starting opening 34 and changes the time of the first symbol to a time shorter than a preset change time. I think it is better to stop shortening to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34 for the purpose of shortening the variation time of the first symbol, and the skip suppression effect using the skip promotion effect. The same effect can be achieved.

  As the time tl set as the threshold value, in addition to tla described above, the second symbol starts variable display from the time when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 (for example, time Tm7 in FIG. 10). From the time length (for example, time Tm9 in FIG. 10) (hereinafter, also referred to as time tlb) or the time when the player operates the game ball firing button 26 (for example, time Tm7 in FIG. 10) to the second time point. It is possible to apply the time length (hereinafter, also referred to as time tlc) until the time when the detection sensor of the starting opening 34 detects the entry of the game ball (for example, until time Tm8 in FIG. 10).

E11. Modification 11:
As described in Modification 10, the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is used in a mode in which it is stopped when the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol becomes shorter than the time tl. In this case, the player recognizes that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is stopped, and thus the remaining time of the variation time of the first symbol is short and it is estimated that the end of the variation display of the first symbol is near. Like By utilizing such a change in the psychology of the player due to the execution/stop of the skip promotion effect, the following effect can be executed.

  FIG. 66 is a time chart showing the timing of executing the skip promotion effect in the modification 11.

  The pachinko machine 10 indicates that the reach effect executed during the variable display of the first symbol is a normal reach effect and a super-reach that suggests that the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when the normal reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute an effect and a special reach effect that suggests that the chance of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than that of the super reach effect. That is, when the super reach effect is executed after the reach effect, the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the reach effect is executed, and when the special reach effect is executed after the super reach effect. Is more likely to win the jackpot lottery than when only the reach effect and the super reach effect are executed.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in this modified example, the reach effect executed during the variable display of the first symbol, the repeated skip promotion effect is executed until a predetermined time before the super reach effect ends, and the reach effect of each reach effect is changed. When the remaining time until the end is shorter than the time tld, the skip promotion effect is stopped. Hereinafter, the time chart will be described in chronological order.

  When the player recognizes that the reach effect has been executed, he/she expects that there is a high possibility that he/she will win the jackpot lottery in the game time, and has a sense of expectation. After that, when it is recognized that the skip promotion effect that has been repeatedly executed is stopped during the execution of the reach effect, it is estimated that the variable display of the first symbol ends. As a result, the player estimates that the first symbol effect does not develop into a super reach effect or a special reach effect. In other words, the player estimates that it is unlikely to win the jackpot lottery in the game times, feels lost, and becomes psychologically disappointed.

  However, after that, when recognizing that the super reach production was executed, the player overestimated that it was unlikely to win the jackpot lottery in the game times, but the guess was overturned, Along with the expectation again, I feel unexpectedness and my intonation changes.

  After that, despite the situation in which the player reached the expectation again due to the execution of the super-reach effect, after that, when recognizing that the skip promotion effect that had been repeatedly executed was stopped during the execution of the super-reach effect. The player again estimates that the variable display of the first symbol will end. As a result, the player speculates that the first symbol effect does not develop into the special reach effect, and again feels lost and becomes psychologically disappointed.

  However, after that, when recognizing that the special effect has been executed, the player once assumed that it was unlikely to win the jackpot lottery in the game, but the guess was overturned. This creates more unexpectedness and anticipation, and causes more emotional intonation. After that, the player will know the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game times by executing the lottery result notification effect. In the lottery result announcement production, a big hit or a miss is announced.

  In this way, by devising the timing of executing/stopping the skip promoting effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of loss, and it is possible to give intonation to the mind of the player. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

E12. Modification 12:
Other configurations may be adopted as the configuration of the game board 30. For example, the arrangement positions of the through gate 35a and the center-side first starting port 33 are not limited to the arrangement positions shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing another example (Example 1) as the configuration of the game board 30. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 67, the center-side first starting opening 33 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has entered (passed through) the through gate 35a enters. More specifically, the first start port 33 on the center side is arranged immediately below the through gate 35a.

  With the game board 30 having such a configuration, when the game ball enters the through gate 35a and then enters the center side first starting opening 33, the non-electric auditors object 34a is opened and the second starting opening 34 is formed. The game ball can enter the state, and the player can insert the game ball into the second starting opening 34. As a result, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the game ball enters the second starting port 34 on condition that the game ball enters the central first starting port 33. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the game mainly for the purpose of inserting the game ball into the second starting opening 34 without the purpose of entering the game ball into the center side first starting opening 33. can do.

E13. Modification 13:
As the configuration of the game board 30, the following configurations may be adopted in addition to the above-described embodiment and the modified example 12.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing another example (Example 2) as the configuration of the game board 30. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 68, the through gate 35a is arranged downstream of the right first starting port 44. With the game board 30 having such a configuration, the center side first start is performed by operating the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26 so that the game balls are always distributed on the right side of the game board 30. It becomes possible to enter the opening 33, the through gate 35a, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35b and the right first starting opening 44, and the game can be simplified.

E14. Modification 14:
Further, as the configuration of the game board 30, for example, a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to the game board 30 may be provided.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the game board 30 including the distribution mechanism 150. In the game board 30 shown in FIG. 69, the game balls that have entered the distribution mechanism 150 are alternately distributed to the through gates 35a and the central first starting ports 33.

  FIG. 70 is an illustration showing how the distribution mechanism 150 distributes game balls. As shown in FIG. 70A, when one game ball PB1 enters the distribution mechanism 150 from the ball entering part 151, the game ball PB1 contacts the blade part 152. By coming into contact with the game ball PB1, the blade portion 152 rotates clockwise around the shaft portion 153 by a predetermined angle, and the game ball PB1 is distributed to the ball exit portion 154. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the game ball PB1 distributed to the ball-out portion 154 is discharged from the ball-out portion 154 and enters the center-side first starting opening 33. Further, as shown in FIG. 70(b), unlike the state of FIG. 70(a), the blade portion 152 is in a state of being rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle.

  As shown in FIG. 70C, when another game ball PB2 enters the distribution mechanism 150 from the ball entering part 151 in this state, the game ball PB2 comes into contact with the blade part 152. By contacting the game ball PB2, the blade portion 152 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft portion 153 by a predetermined angle, and distributes the game ball PB2 to the ball exit portion 155. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the game ball PB2 sorted to the ball-out portion 155 is discharged from the ball-out portion 155 and enters the through gate 35a. Further, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the blade portion 152 returns to the state of FIG. 70(a). In this way, the distribution mechanism 150 repeats the operation of FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d), thereby allowing the game ball entered from the ball entering portion 151 to pass through the through gate 35a and the center side first starting opening 33. Alternate to.

  With the game board 30 having such a configuration, the player can enter the game ball into the distribution mechanism 150 to enter the game ball into the through gate 35a and the first start port 33 on the center side. As a result, the game ball can be inserted into the second starting opening 34. That is, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the game ball enters the second starting port 34 on condition that the game ball enters the central first starting port 33. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the game mainly for the purpose of inserting the game ball into the second starting port 34 without the purpose of entering the game ball into the center side first starting port 33. can do.

E15. Modification 15:
As the configuration of the game board 30, it is an area where the game ball emitted from the game ball firing mechanism 81 cannot reach when the operation handle 25 is operated, and when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is played. The specific area SPA that can be reached by the game ball fired from the firing mechanism 81 may be included in the game area PA.

  71: is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the game board 30 in the modification 15. FIG. In FIG. 71, a track Tr1 in which a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 flows through the game area PA when the game ball launching button 26 is operated, and the operation handle 25 is operated with the maximum rotation operation amount. The locus Tr2 in which the gaming ball fired from the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 flows through the gaming area PA when the game is performed is shown. As shown in the figure, the locus Tr1 is located higher than the locus Tr2 in the game area PA. Further, the above-mentioned specific area SPA is an area including the locus Tr1 but not the locus Tr2. The pachinko machine 10 in the present modified example is configured to include such a specific area SPA in the game area PA.

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the firing strength of the game ball emitted by the game ball launching mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launching button 26 depends on the operating handle 25 being operated. It is the emission intensity of the game balls that the game ball firing mechanism 81 cannot fire. More specifically, the launch strength of the game ball that the game ball launch mechanism 81 shoots when the game ball launch button 26 is operated is that the game ball launch mechanism 81 shoots when the operation handle 25 is operated. Greater than the maximum firing strength of the game ball that can be.

  Further, in this modification, as shown in the figure, the second starting port 34 and the non-electric accessory 34a are provided in the specific area SPA. That is, the game ball launching mechanism 26 is operated by the game ball launching mechanism 81 can enter the game ball launching into the second starting opening 34, but the operation handle 25 is operated to play the game ball launching mechanism. The game ball 81 fires cannot enter the second starting opening 34.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a new game property in which the operation of the game ball firing button 26 is indispensable in order to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 34. More specifically, the variation time of the first symbol is shortened to a time shorter than a preset variation time by inserting a game ball into the second starting opening 34 while the first symbol is varyingly displayed. In order to do so, it is necessary to operate the game ball firing button 26 to enter the game ball into the second start opening 34, and it is possible to create a new game property, which can improve the interest of the game. it can.

E16. Modification 16:
As the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball launching button is operated even though the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 can be released from the guide rail 31 by operating the operation handle 25. It may be configured such that the game ball emitted by the game ball firing mechanism 81 by operating 26 is not discharged from the guide rail 31.

  Specifically, when the area in which the game balls emitted from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and released from the guide rail 31 flow is defined as the distribution area, the operation handle 25 is operated by operating the operation handle 25. The game ball that the ball launch mechanism 81 shoots is configured to be able to be discharged from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area. On the other hand, the game ball launch button 26 is configured so that the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launch button 26 is not discharged from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 may have a configuration described below.

  72: is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the game board 30 in the modification 16. FIG. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 in the present modified example is distributed as a guide means for guiding a game ball that has been launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and has not been released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area. The mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present modified example is provided with a second start opening 34d at a position where the game ball that has flowed through the guide rail 34c can enter.

  The game balls that have been launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and have not been released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area are distributed through the guide rail 31 in the opposite direction to when they were launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81. Then, it is distributed to the guide rail 34c by the distribution mechanism 34b, and then enters the second starting opening 34d.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game ball shot from the game ball launching mechanism 81 enters the second starting opening 34d.

  As shown in FIG. 73(a), the game ball PB fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 flows through the guide rail 31 toward the flow region.

  As shown in FIG. 73(b), when the game ball PB passes through the position where the distribution mechanism 34b is installed, the distribution mechanism 34b that closes the guide rail 31 is given from the game ball launch mechanism 81. The propulsive force causes the guide rail 31 to rotate in a direction in which the guide rail 31 is opened, and the guide rail 31 flows in the direction of the flow region. After the game ball PB has passed, the distribution mechanism 34b again rotates in the direction of closing the guide rail 31. The game ball PB that has not been released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution region flows in the guide rail 31 in the direction opposite to that when it was launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81.

  As shown in FIG. 73(c), the game ball PB which is not discharged from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area and flows in the direction opposite to that when the guide rail 31 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 is a distribution mechanism. It is distributed to the guide rail 34c by 34b, and then enters the second starting opening 34d.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a new game property in which the game ball emitted by the game ball launching mechanism 81 is not discharged from the guide rail 31 by operating the game ball launching button 26.

  In addition, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c for guiding the game balls that have not been released from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area are provided, and the game ball guided by the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c can enter the second start. Since the mouth 34d is provided, in order to insert the game ball into the second starting port 34d, a new operation such as operating the operation handle 25 or the game ball firing button 26 so as not to release the game ball from the guide rail 31 to the distribution area. Amusement can be created.

  Further, in a normal gaming machine, the guide rail 31 is structurally constructed so as not to be seen by the player. Therefore, after being emitted from the game ball launching mechanism 81 and flowing through the guide rail 31, the guide rail 31 is distributed in the opposite direction, and the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c are distributed to enter the second starting opening 34d. Is not visible to the player. Therefore, for example, while the first symbol is variably displayed, the player operates the game ball launch button 26 to cause the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 to enter the second start opening 34d, When the variation time of the symbol of 1 is shortened to a time shorter than the preset variation time, the process of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 81 until it enters the second starting opening 34d is from the player. Since it is not visible, it is possible to let the player recognize as if the game ball firing button 26 itself has a function of shifting the variable display of the first symbol to the stop display, and a new game property is provided. It is possible to create games and improve the interest of games.

  In this modification, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c are provided as guide means until the game balls that have not been discharged from the guide rail 31 enter the second starting opening 34d. A recess may be formed on the rail 31. Then, the second starting port 34d may be provided inside the recess. The game balls not discharged from the guide rail 31 flow through the guide rail 31 in the opposite direction and are guided to the second starting port 34d by dropping into the recess, and then enter the second starting port 34. By doing so, the distribution mechanism 34b and the guide rail 34c can be omitted, and the structure can be simplified.

E17. Modification 17:
In the above-described embodiment and modified example, the configuration in which the game ball is ejected from the game ball ejecting mechanism 81 by the operation of the game ball ejecting button 26 is performed by the program control process (game ball ejecting control process) executed by the main MPU 62. Although realized, the structure in which the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by operating the game ball launching button 26 may be implemented by a mechanical structure. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball firing button 26 and an internal gear that is operated by rotating the operation handle 25 are mechanically connected via a plurality of gears or the like. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the internal gear operates to launch the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 with a predetermined launch strength. By adopting such a configuration, the program control processing related to the operation of the game ball firing button 26 can be simplified or omitted.

  As an example, in the case where the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the internal gear operates more than the case where the operation handle 25 is operated with the maximum rotation operation amount, and thus the operation handle 25 is even operated. The game ball may be launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a launch strength stronger than the maximum launch strength. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify or omit the program control process related to the operation of the game ball launch button 26 in the modified example 15.

E18. Modification 18:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that gives a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-ball type, for example, is provided with a plurality of reels to which a plurality of types of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction, starts reel rotation by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and operates a stop switch. After the reels stop after a predetermined time elapses, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the reel starts to rotate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

F. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments and the like:
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In addition, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic A1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (first symbol display part 37a), the game ball to the first ball entry part (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) The first variation condition based on the entry of the first variation condition is displayed as a trigger, and when the first variation time preset as the variation time which is the time for varying the first symbol is displayed, First symbol control means for stopping and displaying the first symbol (main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 92),
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) is the second symbol based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part (second starting opening 34). Along with the variable display triggered by the establishment of the variable condition, the second symbol is stopped and displayed when the second variable time preset as the variable time, which is the time for displaying the second symbol in a variable manner, elapses. 2 symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound light side MPU92),
Variable time shortening means (function of executing step S504) for performing a variable time shortening process for shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variable time,
A gaming machine comprising:
The fluctuation time shortening means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variable time reduction process is executed based on the combination of the second symbols stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means. It is determined whether or not (step S801, step S1001)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic A1, since the variation time shortening process for reducing the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time is executed, for example, the first variation time preset in a predetermined game time. If the variable time is long, the variation time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored with the concentration of the game in the predetermined game times. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine described in Feature A1,
The fluctuation time shortening means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variable time reduction process is executed based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays. It is determined whether or not (step S1201)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic A2, the variation time shortening means, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays, It is determined whether to execute the variable time reduction process. Therefore, the combination of the first symbols stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means differs depending on whether or not the variable time reduction process is executed. Therefore, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means by recognizing whether or not the variable time reduction process is executed, and an expectation different from the conventional one. Feeling and playability can be provided.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination (big hit and small hit) in which the variation time reduction process is executed is more than the probability that the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination in which the variation time reduction process is not executed. Is also set to be higher (FIG. 8: win/fail table for the second starting opening)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A3, it is possible to execute the variation time reduction process with high probability.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3,
The fluctuation time shortening means,
After the first symbol starts variable display, the second symbol starts variable display,
While the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays does not satisfy a specific condition, the combination of the second symbols that the second symbol control means stops and displays satisfies the specific conditions. In this case, the variation time reduction processing is executed.

  According to the characteristic A4, when the first symbol combination satisfies a specific condition, or when there is a predetermined process executed when the second symbol combination satisfies a specific condition, It can be avoided that both the 1st symbol and the 2nd symbol satisfy the specific condition and the execution conditions of the predetermined process conflict with each other.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The second variation condition is
While being established based on a ball entering the second ball entering portion in a period in which the second symbol is not variably displayed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is not established based on a ball entering the second ball entering portion during a period in which the second symbol is variably displayed.

  According to the characteristic A5, the second variation condition is satisfied based on the entry into the second entry portion during the period in which the second symbol is not variably displayed, while the second symbol is variably displayed. It does not hold based on the entrance into the second entrance portion during the period. In other words, when there is a game ball entering the second ball part during the period in which the second symbol is variably displayed, there is a so-called hold function for holding the ball entering the game ball. Absent. Therefore, the player can easily control the timing at which the second variation condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can easily control the timing at which the variable time reduction process is executed.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The fluctuation time shortening unit stops and displays the first symbol that is displaying the fluctuation by the timing when the second symbol that is displaying the fluctuation is stopped and displayed. The fluctuation time shortening process for shortening the fluctuation time of the symbol to a time shorter than the first fluctuation time is executed,
The first fluctuation time is determined by lottery from a plurality of preset fluctuation times,
The second variation time is determined by lottery from a plurality of preset variation times,
The expected value of the second fluctuation time determined by the lottery is shorter than the expected value of the first fluctuation time determined by the lottery.

  If the second variable time is longer than the first variable time, if the second symbol starts variable display after the first symbol starts variable display, the second symbol stops and displays. Since the first symbol is stopped and displayed earlier than that, the second symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the second symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the first symbol is stopped and displayed. It is not possible to execute the fluctuation time shortening process for shortening the fluctuation time of 1 to a time shorter than the first fluctuation time.

  According to the characteristic A6, the expected value of the second variation time determined by the lottery is shorter than the expected value of the first variation time determined by the lottery, and therefore the first symbol is displayed after the variation display is started. Even when the symbol 2 starts the variable display, the variable time reduction process can be executed.

[Feature A7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6,
The second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) is from the first ball entry portion (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) in the direction in which the game balls flow down. A gaming machine characterized by being located upstream.

  In the case where the second ball entering portion is arranged downstream of the first ball entering portion, if the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the second ball entering portion also The game ball is in a state where it is easy for the player to enter the ball, and the variation time shortening process which is not intended by the player is executed.

  According to the characteristic A7, the second ball-in portion is arranged upstream of the first ball-in portion with respect to the direction in which the game ball flows down, so that the game ball is in the first ball-in portion. Although it is possible to enter the ball, it is possible to make a state in which the game ball does not enter the second ball entering portion, and it is possible to prevent the variation time shortening process not intended by the player from being executed.

[Feature A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7,
The entry of the game ball into the second entry portion is restricted and the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion is allowed only when a specific entry condition is satisfied. A game machine comprising a ball limiting mechanism (non-electric accessory 34a).

  According to the characteristic A8, since the entry restriction mechanism is provided, it is possible to suppress entry of a game ball into the second entry part that the player does not intend.

[Feature A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
In the case where the first symbol is variably displayed, when the variation time shortening means executes the variation time reduction process,
The effect execution means,
A gaming machine characterized by executing a stop display effect (skip effect) that suggests that the first symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed.

  According to the characteristic A9, since the stop display effect is executed, the player can recognize that the variable time reduction process is executed.

[Characteristic A10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means,
When the first variable condition is satisfied and the first symbol starts variable display, the first effect (first symbol effect) is executed,
After the first variable condition is satisfied and the first symbol starts variable display, the second variable condition is satisfied and the second symbol starts variable display. A game machine characterized by executing a second effect (non-skipable effect, jackpot notification effect) when the variable time reduction means determines not to execute the variable time reduction process.

  According to the characteristic A10, when the variation time shortening unit determines not to perform the variation time reduction process, the second effect is executed, so the player is aware that the variation time reduction process is not executed. Can be made

[Feature A11]
A gaming machine described in Feature A10,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the first symbol is variably displayed, and when the second effect (non-skipable effect, jackpot notification effect) is executed,
The effect to be executed as the second effect is selected from a plurality of preset effects according to the remaining time of the first fluctuation time (step S3302).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A11, the effect to be executed as the second effect is selected from a plurality of preset effects according to the remaining time of the first variation time, so the first symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute an effect according to the timing, and to add intonation and narrative to the effect. Further, since the time required for the second effect is shorter than the first change time, the event that the second effect is ended midway, or the first change time even if the second effect is ended It is possible to suppress such a phenomenon that there is a surplus, and the second effect can be executed as an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature A12]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means,
Characterizing a guide effect that guides that the first symbol may be stopped and displayed when the second symbol is entered into the ball during the period in which the first symbol is variably displayed. And the gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic A12, since the guide effect is executed, the player may stop and display the first symbol if he or she enters the second ball entering portion during the period in which the first symbol is variably displayed. Can recognize that there is.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature B1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (first symbol display part 37a), the game ball to the first ball entry part (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) The first variation condition based on the entry of the first variation condition is displayed as a trigger, and when the first variation time preset as the variation time which is the time for varying the first symbol is displayed, First symbol control means for stopping and displaying the first symbol (main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 92),
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) is the second symbol based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part (second starting opening 34). Along with the variable display triggered by the establishment of the variable condition, the second symbol is stopped and displayed when the second variable time preset as the variable time, which is the time for displaying the second symbol in a variable manner, elapses. 2 symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound light side MPU92),
Variable time shortening means (function of executing step S504) for performing a variable time shortening process for shortening the variable time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variable time,
Shortening promoting means that allows the player to intentionally promote the execution of the changing time shortening processing by the changing time shortening means (at a position where the player can enter the ball when the game ball is launched at the maximum launch intensity). 2 structure of the game board 30 provided with the starting port 34, the game ball launch button 26),
A game machine characterized by being provided.

  According to the feature B1, since the variation time shortening process for reducing the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time is executed, for example, the first variation time preset in a predetermined game time. When the value is long, the variation time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discontinuous and bored with his concentration on the game at the predetermined game times. In addition, since it is possible for the player to intentionally prompt the execution of the variation time reduction processing, the player can prompt the execution of the variation time reduction processing at a desired timing. For example, when a player feels that he cannot expect a big hit at a predetermined game time and wants to end the predetermined game time early, the player intentionally urges execution of the variable time reduction process, and then the predetermined game time. Can be ended early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored with concentration at each game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine described in Feature B1,
The fluctuation time shortening means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variable time reduction process is executed based on the combination of the second symbols stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means. Or not,
A game machine characterized in that the shortening promoting means enables a player to intentionally promote establishment of the second variation condition.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to simplify the mechanism that allows the player to intentionally prompt the execution of the variable time reduction process. That is, by allowing the player to intentionally promote the establishment of the second variable condition, the variable display of the second symbol by the second symbol control means is prompted. As a result, based on the combination of the second symbols stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means, execution of the variable time reduction process is prompted.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine described in Feature B2,
The player is provided with operation means (operation handle 25) that is operated to shoot a game ball,
The shortening promoting means includes operation assisting means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting the operation by the player,
When the player operates the operation assisting means, the emission strength of the game ball that is emitted by the operation of the operating means is increased so that the probability of the game ball entering the second ball entering portion is increased. A gaming machine characterized by executing a firing intensity adjustment process for adjusting to.

  According to the feature B3, since the operation assisting means is provided, it is possible to facilitate the operation that the player should perform in order for the player to intentionally prompt the player to intentionally execute the variation time reduction processing by the variation time reduction means.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
A player is provided with an operating means for operating to shoot a game ball,
The second ball entering portion is a position where the game ball shot at the maximum strength enters when the operating means is operated by the player so that the launch strength of the game ball becomes maximum strength. A gaming machine characterized by being placed in.

  According to the feature B4, the second ball entering portion is arranged at a position where the game ball enters when the operating means is operated by the player so that the launch strength of the game ball becomes maximum strength. Therefore, the player can enter the game ball into the second ball entering portion by the easy operation of the operating means. That is, the player can intentionally insert the game ball into the second ball entering portion by the easy operation of the operation means, and as a result, the variation time reduction processing is executed by the variation time reduction means. Can be intentionally urged by a person.

  The inventions of the characteristic group A and the characteristic group B solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, in each game time, an effect according to the variation time of the symbol in the game time is executed.

  However, when the variation time of the symbol in a predetermined game time is long, there is a problem that the player loses his or her concentration on the game and gets bored, which lowers the interest of the game.

  Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game and further improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic C1]
With the entry of the game ball into the first entry unit as a trigger, the first symbol display means (first symbol display unit 37a) variably displays the first symbol displayed by the first symbol control means (main side MPU62). , Sound-light side MPU 92),
A second symbol control means (main side MPU62) that variably displays the second symbol displayed by the second symbol display device (second symbol display part 37b), triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry part. , Sound-light side MPU 92),
A gaming machine comprising:
Although the second symbol control means starts variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol control means variably displays the first symbol,
The first symbol control means prohibits starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol control means variably displays the second symbol (second embodiment and second). Variation start process for the first start port in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When performing a predetermined process in which there is a correlation between the variable display of the first symbol and the variable display of the second symbol, the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol is variable displayed. When is started, it may be difficult to execute the predetermined processing, or a problem may occur in the game playability of the gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic C1, the second symbol control means, the first symbol control means starts the variable display of the second symbol when the first symbol control means variably displays the first symbol, but the first symbol control The means prohibits starting the variable display of the first symbol when the second symbol control means causes the second symbol to be variably displayed. That is, the variable display of the second symbol may be started during the variable display of the first symbol, but the variable display of the first symbol is not started during the variable display of the second symbol. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the difficulty regarding the execution of the predetermined process and the problem regarding the playability of the gaming machine.

[Characteristic C2]
A gaming machine described in Feature C1,
The first symbol control means,
In the case where the second symbol control means is variably displaying the second symbol, the combination of the second symbols stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means is a combination satisfying a specific condition. Only, it is prohibited to start the variable display of the first symbol (variation start process for the first starting opening in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic C2, the first symbol control means prohibits the start of the variable display of the first symbol, and the second symbol control means causes the second symbol to be variably displayed. Then, because it is limited only to the case where the combination of the second symbols that the second symbol control means makes a stop display is a combination that satisfies a specific condition, in other cases, the second symbol control means is the second symbol. The variable display of the first symbol can be started when the variable display is performed. Therefore, compared with the control that prohibits starting the variable display of the first symbol in all cases in which the second symbol control means causes the second symbol to be variably displayed, the first symbol is frequently displayed. The variable display can be started.

[Characteristic C3]
A gaming machine described in Feature C1 or Feature C2,
The first symbol control means,
When the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed upon the entry of the game sphere into the second sphere (the first variation stop process).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic C3, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion. For example, when the variation time of the first symbol set in advance in a predetermined game time is long, the player can stop and display the first symbol by inserting the game ball into the second ball entering portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored at the predetermined game times, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic C4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
The second ball entry portion (second starting opening 34) is
A gaming machine, which is arranged at a position that allows a player to intentionally enter a game ball.

  According to the characteristic C4, the player can intentionally change and display the second symbol. Further, in the case where the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed upon the entry into the second entry portion, so that the player intentionally displays the first symbol. The symbol 1 can be stopped and displayed.

[Characteristic C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4,
A game machine comprising: auxiliary means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting a player to intentionally enter a game ball into the second ball entering portion.

  According to the characteristic C5, since the auxiliary means is provided, it is easy for the player to intentionally insert the game ball into the second ball entering portion. Further, when the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol can be stopped and displayed upon the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion, so that the assisting means can play the game. This makes it easy for a person to intentionally stop and display the first symbol.

  The invention of the characteristic group C solves the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various kinds of processing have been added or improved for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  However, as various processes are added or improved, there are problems that difficulty occurs when executing a predetermined process or a problem in game play.

  Here, in order to avoid the above problems, further improvement in technology is desired.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature D1]
With the entry of the game ball into the first entry portion as a trigger, first symbol display means (first symbol display portion 37a) for starting the variable display of the first symbol,
With the entry of the game ball into the second entry portion as a trigger, the second symbol display means (the second symbol display portion 37b) for starting the variable display of the second symbol,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
When the first symbol starts the variable display, and the second symbol starts the variable display,
Based on the time from when the variable display of the second symbol is started until the first symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect to be executed is decided upon the start of the variable display of the second symbol (step). (S1501, S3302)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D1, various effects can be executed according to the time from the start of variable display of the second symbol to the stop display of the first symbol. In addition, since the effect to be executed is determined by the start of the variable display of the second symbol, the player can be made aware of the start of the variable display of the second symbol. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine described in Feature D1,
The first symbol display means,
In the case where the first symbol is variably displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed upon the entry of the game sphere into the second sphere part (first variation stop processing).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D2, in the gaming machine which stops and displays the first symbol upon entry of the game ball into the second entry portion, the player starts the variable display of the second symbol. Along with the recognition, it is possible to execute the effect of recognizing the stop display of the first symbol. Therefore, by executing the effect, the player strongly recognizes the entry of the game ball into the second entry part, the start of the variable display of the second symbol, and the stop display of the first symbol. Can be made

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2,
The second ball entering portion is arranged at a position that allows the player to intentionally enter the game ball (a position where the game ball can enter when the game ball is fired at the maximum firing strength). A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature D3, the second ball entering portion is arranged at a position that allows the player to intentionally enter the game ball, so that the player intentionally has the second symbol. The variable display can be started. Then, the effect determined by the effect execution unit in the feature D1 is executed, so that the player intentionally enters the second ball entering unit to start the variation table of the second symbol. Can be made aware of that.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A game machine comprising: auxiliary means (game ball launch button 26) for assisting a player to intentionally enter a game ball into the second ball entering portion.

  According to the characteristic D4, since the player is provided with the assisting means for assisting the player to intentionally enter the game ball into the second ball entering portion, the player intentionally enters the game ball into the second ball entering portion. Becomes easier to enter, and it becomes easier to intentionally start the variable display of the second symbol. Then, the effect determined by the effect execution unit in the feature D1 is executed, so that the player intentionally allows the game ball to enter the second ball entering unit, whereby the variable display of the second symbol is displayed. It can be recognized that it has started.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
When the second symbol starts variable display while the first symbol is variable displayed,
The effect execution means,
As the effect to be executed based on the time from when the variable display of the second symbol is started until the first symbol is stopped and displayed, the first symbol that is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggested stop display effect (skip effect).

  According to the feature D5, by executing the stop display effect, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the variable display of the second symbol and the stop display of the first symbol.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature E1]
The first special information is acquired upon the entry of the game ball into the first entrance section, and the second special information is acquired upon the entry of the game ball into the second entrance section. Information acquisition means,
Based on the first special information, a first symbol display means (first symbol display portion 37a) for displaying the first symbol,
Based on the second special information, second symbol display means (second symbol display portion 37b) for displaying the second symbol,
Based on the first special information, while displaying a first display image (image displayed in the first liquid crystal symbol display area 41b) corresponding to the first symbol, the second special information An image display means for displaying a second display image which is an image corresponding to the second symbol (image displayed in the second liquid crystal symbol display area 41c) based on
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is set to the display image. A gaming machine characterized by making a decision based on the corresponding special information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1).

  According to the characteristic E1, since the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the special information corresponding to the display image, it is displayed on the image display means. It is possible to make the player who recognizes the display image guess the content of the special information corresponding to the display image, and give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine described in Feature E1,
The image display means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is set to the display image. A gaming machine characterized by making a determination based on a degree of advantage for the player regarding the corresponding special information.

  According to the characteristic E2, the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the degree of advantage for the player regarding the special information corresponding to the display image. The player who recognizes the display image displayed on the image display means can be made to guess the degree of advantage of the special information corresponding to the display image for the player, and the player can be given a sense of expectation.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The image display means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed,
When the first special information is more advantageous to the player than the second special information, the first display image is displayed larger than the second display image,
A game machine characterized by displaying the second display image larger than the first display image when the second special information is more advantageous to the player than the first special information.

  According to the characteristic E3, since the display image corresponding to the special information which is advantageous to the player is displayed larger than the other display image, the special information which is advantageous to the player is dealt with. It is possible to draw attention to the displayed image and give a sense of expectation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed,
A game machine characterized in that the first symbol display means causes the first symbol to be stopped and displayed upon the entry of a game ball into the second entry portion.

  According to the feature E4, the first symbol is stopped and displayed upon the entry of the game ball into the second entry part, so that the player enters the game ball into the second entry part. Thus, the variable display of the first symbol can be stopped and displayed in a short time. Further, at that time, since the size of displaying at least one of the first display image and the second display image is determined based on the special information corresponding to the display image, the display image displayed on the image display means. It is possible to make the player who has recognized the information about the content of the special information corresponding to the display image and give the player a sense of expectation.

  The inventions of the characteristic group D and the characteristic group E solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further improvement of the technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature F1]
A game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area,
A ball entry portion (second starting port 34) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Detecting means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
A signal is output when the game ball has not been detected by the detecting means, even though the game ball has been emitted by the game ball emitting means at a launch intensity satisfying a predetermined emission condition, but by the detecting means. Signal output means for outputting (abnormality detection processing in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature F1, the state of the gaming machine can be detected based on the signal output by the signal output means. For example, when the game ball launched with a launch strength satisfying a predetermined launch condition is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter, an abnormality of the gaming machine based on the signal output by the signal output means, Illegal games can be detected. If the signal output from the signal output means is received, the game ball launching means does not normally control the launch intensity of the game ball, or the ball entry area or its surroundings are normal or abnormal. It is possible to detect various states of the gaming machine, such as an event that the entry of the game ball into the entry portion is blocked instead of such a state.

[Feature F2]
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The ball entrance section (second starting opening 34) is a ball entrance section in which the information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the ball entrance section. A gaming machine.

  A fraud or abnormality related to the ball entry portion that acquires special information triggered by the entry of a game ball is serious, and it is desirable to detect such fraud or abnormality early. According to the feature F2, based on the signal output by the signal output means, it is possible to early detect an irregularity or abnormality regarding the ball entry portion that acquires the special information triggered by the entry of the game ball.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
The signal output means,
When the detection means does not detect the entry of the game ball into the entry part within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launches the game ball with a launch strength satisfying the predetermined launch condition, The signal is output (steps S4206 and S4208).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F3, the signal output means causes the detection means to enter the game ball into the entrance portion within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launches the game ball with a launch intensity satisfying a predetermined launch condition. Since the signal is output when the signal is not detected, it is possible to detect the irregularity or the abnormality earlier based on the signal.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
The signal output means,
Based on the number of times the detection means does not detect the entry of the game ball into the entry part within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launches the game ball with a launch intensity satisfying the predetermined launch condition. And outputs the signal (step S4215).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F4, even if the game ball that has been launched by the game ball launching means with a launch strength satisfying a predetermined launch condition does not enter the ball entry part, it is possible to effectively detect fraud or abnormality in the game machine. can do.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A game player launches a game ball to the game ball launching device, which is operated by a player to rotate the game ball to the game ball launching device at a launching intensity corresponding to a rotation operation amount of the operating device by the player. Equipped with operation means (operation handle 25) for firing a ball,
The launch strength that satisfies the predetermined launch condition is equivalent to the launch strength of the game ball that the game ball launching means shoots when the player turns the operating means so that the turning operation amount becomes the largest. A gaming machine characterized by a launch strength of.

  According to the characteristic F5, when the player turns the operation means so that the turning operation amount becomes the largest, the game is launched with a launch strength equal to the launch strength of the game ball launched by the game ball launching means. When the ball entrance portion is provided at a position where the ball easily enters, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine or an illegal game based on the signal output by the signal output means.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
It is an auxiliary operation means operated by a player to cause the game ball launching means to shoot a game ball, and the game ball is launched to the game ball launching means at a predetermined launch intensity by the operation of the auxiliary operating means by the player. Equipped with auxiliary operation means (game ball launch button 26) to
A game machine characterized in that the launch strength satisfying the predetermined launch condition is a launch strength of a game ball that the game ball launching means shoots when a player operates the auxiliary operating means.

  According to the feature F6, when the player enters the ball entry portion at a position where the game ball launched with the launch strength of the game ball launched by the game ball launching means when the player operates the auxiliary operating means is easy to enter. In addition, it is possible to detect an abnormal game machine or an illegal game based on the signal output by the signal output means.

  The invention of the characteristic F group solves the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various processing and structure improvements are made for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

  However, with the improvement of these processes and structures, there is a problem that a trouble of the gaming machine occurs and it becomes impossible to prevent fraud by the player.

  In such a gaming machine, it is preferable to be able to promptly detect a malfunction of the gaming machine, cheating by the player, etc. in order to improve the soundness of the game while improving the interest of the game.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic G1]
The first symbol displayed on the first symbol display means (first symbol display portion 37a), the game ball to the first ball entry portion (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) First symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound and light side MPU92) that is variably displayed upon establishment of the first variation condition based on the entry of the ball,
The second symbol displayed on the second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) is the second symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry part (second starting opening 34). Second symbol control means (main side MPU62, sound and light side MPU92) to be displayed in a variable manner when the variable condition is satisfied, and
While restricting the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section, and when the game ball enters the third ball entry section (through gate 35a), the game to the second ball entry section A ball entry limiting mechanism (non-electric accessory 34a) that allows entry of a ball;
A gaming machine comprising:
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entering portion is arranged at a position where a game ball entering the third ball entering portion enters.

  According to the feature G1, when the game ball enters the first ball entering part after entering the third ball entering part, the ball entry limiting mechanism allows the game ball to enter the second ball entering part. It becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entering section. As a result, it is possible to create a new game property such that the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering part on condition that the game ball is entered into the first ball entering part.

[Characteristic G2]
A gaming machine described in Feature G1,
A game machine characterized in that the first ball entering portion is arranged immediately below the third ball entering portion.

  According to the characteristic G2, the guide flow path that guides the game ball that has entered the third ball-entering portion to the first ball-entering portion, and the other game balls that have entered the third ball-entering portion are first. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball that has entered the third ball entering section is allowed to enter the first ball entering section without providing a structure for entering the ball entering section.

[Characteristic G3]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1 or the feature G2,
The first symbol control means causes the first symbol to be stopped and displayed when a first variation time preset as a variation time, which is a time for varyingly displaying the first symbol, has elapsed,
The second symbol control means causes the second symbol to be stopped and displayed when a second variation time preset as a variation time, which is a time for varyingly displaying the second symbol, has elapsed,
The gaming machine includes a variation time shortening means for executing variation time reduction processing for reducing the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time,
The variation time shortening means, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, based on the combination of the second symbols stopped and displayed by the second symbol control means, A gaming machine characterized by determining whether or not to execute a variable time reduction process.

  According to the characteristic G3, the variation time shortening process for reducing the variation time of the first symbol to a time shorter than the first variation time is executed, so that, for example, the first variation time preset in a predetermined game time. If the variable time is long, the variation time shortening process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and bored with the concentration of the game in the predetermined game times. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Further, with the configuration of the characteristic G1, in order to variably display the first symbol and the second symbol, the game ball to the second ball entering part is conditioned on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering part. The condition is to enter. Therefore, in order to execute the variable time shortening process described in this feature G3, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance section and then enter the game ball into the second ball entrance section. It can be a condition, and a new playability can be created.

[Characteristic G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The fluctuation time shortening means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the variable time reduction process is executed based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays. A gaming machine characterized by determining whether or not.

  According to the feature G4, the variation time shortening means, when the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, based on the combination of the first symbols that the first symbol control means stops and displays, It is determined whether to execute the variable time reduction process. Therefore, the combination of the first symbols stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means differs depending on whether or not the variable time reduction process is executed. Therefore, the player can predict the combination of the first symbols to be stopped and displayed by the first symbol control means by recognizing whether or not the variable time reduction process is executed, and an expectation different from the conventional one. Feeling and playability can be provided.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature H1]
A first operation means (operation handle 25),
Second operation means (game ball launch button 26),
When the first operation means or the second operation means is operated, a game ball launching means (a launch control device 80, a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball into a game area,
A gaming machine comprising:
The game area is
When the first operation means is operated, the game ball launched by the game ball launching means is an area that cannot be reached, and when the second operation means is operated, the game ball launching means launches the game ball. A gaming machine including a specific area (specific area SPA) that can be reached by the played game ball.

  According to the feature H1, the game area is an area where the game ball shot by the game ball launching means cannot reach when the first operating means is operated, and when the second operating means is operated. Since the game ball launched by the game ball launching means includes a specific area that can be reached, a new game property can be created by using the specific area. Since the specific area is an area that is reached only when the game ball is shot by operating the second operating means, it is necessary to create a gaming property in which the operation of the second operating means is essential. You can

[Characteristic H2]
A gaming machine described in Feature H1,
The first operation means is
Equipped with a rotatable operation unit,
The game ball launching means,
A gaming machine, which shoots a game ball into the game area with a launch strength according to a turning operation amount of the turning operation unit.

  According to Feature H2, the first operating means comprises a rotary operating part. Therefore, for example, when the second operation means is configured to cause the game ball emission means to emit the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operation methods of the first operation means and the second operation means are different. As a result, it is possible to create a game property having various operability, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine described in the feature H1 or the feature H2,
In the specific area,
There is provided a specific ball entry part (FIG. 71: second starting port 34) into which the game ball shot by the game ball launching device can enter when the second operating device is operated. Characteristic gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic H3, since the specific ball-in portion is provided in the specific region, the game property is created in which the game ball is inserted into the specific ball-in portion by operating the second operating means. can do. In other words, it is possible to create a game property in which the operation of the second operation means is indispensable in order to allow the game ball to enter the specific entrance portion.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine described in Feature H3,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entrance unit is a ball entrance unit that the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance unit. ..

  According to the feature H4, the specific entrance portion is the entrance portion for which the information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance portion. It is possible to make the game ball enter the ball entering part of the game an important factor in the playability of the game machine. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the operation of the second operation means for causing the game ball to enter the specific entrance portion is the main feature of the game machine.

[Characteristic H5]
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4,
A predetermined ball entrance portion (center side first starting opening 33, right side first starting opening 44) different from the specific ball entering portion, which is a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter.
A first symbol display means (first symbol display part 37a) for starting variable display of the first symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry part,
A second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) for starting the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry part,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the second symbol display means causes the second symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the first symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature H5, when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner, when the player operates the second operation means to enter the game ball into a specific ball entrance portion, the second symbol Starts changing display and then shifts to stop display. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, it is possible to create a new game property such that the player operates the second operation means to stop and display the first symbol.

<Feature group I>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic I1]
A first operation means (operation handle 25),
Second operation means (game ball launch button 26),
When the first operation means or the second operation means is operated, a game ball launching means (a launch control device 80, a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball into a game area,
A gaming machine comprising:
When the second operation means is operated, the emission intensity of the game sphere emitted by the game sphere emission means can be emitted by the game sphere emission means by operating the first operation means. A gaming machine characterized by a launch strength of a gaming ball that cannot be played.

  According to the characteristic I1, the firing intensity of the game ball emitted by the game ball launching means by operating the second operating means is the launch intensity of the game ball launching means by operating the first operating means. Since it is the emission intensity of the game ball that cannot be performed, for example, only the game ball emitted with the emission intensity output by the game ball emission means can be involved only when the second operation means is operated, By providing a game element such as a ball portion, a new game property can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
The emission intensity of the game ball emitted by the game ball launching means by operating the second operating means can be launched by the game ball launching means by operating the first operating means. A gaming machine characterized by being greater than the maximum launch strength of a gaming ball.

  According to the characteristic I2, when the second operating means is operated, the first operating means is operated, and the game ball launching means launches a game ball which is larger than the maximum launch strength of the game ball that can be launched. Since the game ball can be fired at a high intensity, for example, the second operation means is operated, the first operation means is operated, and the game ball emission means can fire the game ball. It is possible to create new amusement and enhance the enjoyment of the game by providing an accessory and a ball entry part that can only participate in the game ball that is launched with a launch strength greater than the maximum launch strength. it can.

[Characteristic I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The first operation means is
Equipped with a rotatable operation unit,
The game ball launching means,
A gaming machine, which shoots a game ball into the game area with a launch strength according to a turning operation amount of the turning operation unit.

  According to Feature I3, the first operating means comprises a rotary operating part. Therefore, for example, when the second operation means is configured to cause the game ball emission means to emit the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operation methods of the first operation means and the second operation means are different. As a result, it is possible to create a game property having various operability, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The game area is
When the first operation means is operated, the game ball launched by the game ball launching means is an area that cannot be reached, and when the second operation means is operated, the game ball launching means launches the game ball. A gaming machine including a specific area (specific area SPA) that can be reached by the played game ball.

  According to the characteristic I4, the game area is an area where the game ball emitted by the game ball emitting means cannot reach when the first operation means is operated, and when the second operation means is operated. Since the game ball launched by the game ball launching means includes a specific area that can be reached, a new game property can be created by using the specific area. Since the specific area is an area that is reached only when the game ball is shot by operating the second operating means, it is necessary to create a game property in which the operation of the second operating means is essential. You can

[Characteristic I5]
A gaming machine described in Feature I4,
In the specific area,
There is provided a specific ball entry part (FIG. 71: second starting port 34) into which the game ball shot by the game ball launching device can enter when the second operating device is operated. Characteristic gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic I5, since the specific ball-in portion is provided in the specific region, the game property that the game ball is inserted into the specific ball-in portion by operating the second operation means is created. can do. In other words, it is possible to create a game property in which the operation of the second operation means is indispensable in order to allow the game ball to enter the specific entrance portion.

[Characteristic I6]
A game machine according to feature I5,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entrance unit is a ball entrance unit that the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance unit. ..

  According to the feature I6, the specific entrance portion is the entrance portion for which the information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance portion. It is possible to make the game ball enter the ball entering part of the game an important factor in the playability of the game machine. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the operation of the second operation means for causing the game ball to enter the specific entrance portion is the main feature of the game machine.

[Feature I7]
A gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6,
A predetermined ball entrance portion (center side first starting opening 33, right side first starting opening 44) different from the specific ball entering portion, which is a ball entering portion into which a game ball can enter.
A first symbol display means (first symbol display part 37a) for starting variable display of the first symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry part,
A second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) for starting the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry part,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the second symbol display means causes the second symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the first symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic I7, when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner, when the player operates the second operation means to enter the game ball into a specific ball entrance portion, the second symbol Starts changing display and then shifts to stop display. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, it is possible to create a new game property such that the player operates the second operation means to stop and display the first symbol.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic J1]
A game ball launching means for launching a game ball,
First guiding means (FIG. 72: guiding rail 31) for guiding the game ball emitted from the game ball emitting means,
A distribution area in which the game balls released from the game ball launching means, the game balls released from the first guiding means, flow.
Second guiding means (FIG. 72: sorting mechanism 34b, guiding rail) which is a gaming ball that has been launched by the gaming ball launching means and that guides the gaming ball that has not been released from the first guiding means into the distribution area. 34c),
A specific ball-in portion (FIG. 72: second starting opening 34d) into which the game ball guided by the second guide means can enter,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the second guiding means and the second guiding means for guiding the game balls which have been launched by the game ball launching means and which have not been released from the first guiding means into the distribution area. Since a game ball guided by is provided with a specific ball entrance section into which the game ball can enter, for example, a game element related to the game playability of the game machine, such as effect, operation of a winning character, or lottery process New playability can be created by executing the game when the player enters the game.

[Characteristic J2]
A game machine according to feature J1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entrance unit is a ball entrance unit that the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance unit. ..

  According to the feature J2, the specific entrance portion is the entrance portion for which the information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance portion. It is possible to make the game ball enter the ball entering part of the game an important factor in the playability of the game machine.

[Characteristic J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
A game ball that can enter a game ball, and a predetermined game ball provided in the distribution area (the first start port 33 on the center side, the first start port 44 on the right side),
A first symbol display means (first symbol display part 37a) for starting the variable display of the first symbol upon the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry part,
A second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) that starts variable display of the second symbol upon the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry part,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the second symbol display means causes the second symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the first symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature J3, when the game ball is put into a specific ball entering portion when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second symbol starts a variable display, and then in a stop display. Transition. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, it is possible to create a new game property such that the first symbol is stopped and displayed by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entrance portion.

<Characteristic K group>
The characteristic K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic K1]
A first operation means (operation handle 25),
Second operation means (game ball launch button 26),
When the first operation means or the second operation means is operated, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball (a launch control device 80, a game ball launching mechanism 81),
First guiding means (guide rail 31) for guiding the game ball emitted from the game ball emitting means,
A distribution area in which the game balls emitted from the game ball emitting means, in which the game balls emitted from the first guiding means are in circulation,
A gaming machine comprising:
Also, the first operating means is configured such that the game ball emitted by the game ball emitting means can be released from the first guiding means by operating the first operating means. Regardless of
The second operating means is configured such that the game ball emitted by the game ball emitting means is not emitted from the first guiding means when the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine to do.

  According to the characteristic K1, since the game ball emitted by the game ball launching means is not emitted from the first guiding means when the second operating means is operated, the operation of the second operating means is performed. By providing an accessory or a ball-in portion in which a game ball that has been fired can be created, new playability can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic K2]
The gaming machine described in the feature K1,
The first operation means is
Equipped with a rotatable operation unit,
The game ball launching means,
A gaming machine, which shoots a game ball into a game area with a launch strength according to a turning operation amount of the turning operation unit.

  According to Feature K2, the first operating means comprises a rotary operating part. Therefore, for example, when the second operation means is configured to cause the game ball emission means to emit the game ball by an operation different from the rotation operation, the operation methods of the first operation means and the second operation means are different. As a result, it is possible to create a game property having various operability, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic K3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic K1 or the characteristic K2,
Second guiding means (FIG. 72: sorting mechanism 34b, guiding rail) which is a gaming ball that has been launched by the gaming ball launching means and that guides the gaming ball that has not been released from the first guiding means into the distribution area. 34c),
A specific ball entry portion (second starting opening 34d) into which the game ball guided by the second guiding means can enter,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the characteristic K3, the second guiding means for guiding the game balls that have not been released from the first guiding means to the distribution area, and the specific entrance in which the game balls guided by the second guiding means can enter. Since the ball portion is provided, the first operating means or the second operating means is provided so that the game ball is not discharged from the first guiding means to the distribution area in order to allow the game ball to enter the specific entrance portion. It is possible to create new game play such as operating.

[Characteristic K4]
A gaming machine described in Feature K3,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The specific ball entrance unit is a ball entrance unit that the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific ball entrance unit. ..

According to the characteristic K4, the specific entrance portion is the entrance portion for which the information acquisition means acquires the special information when the game ball enters the specific entrance portion. Putting a game ball into the ball-in portion of the game machine can be an important factor in the playability of the game machine. As a result, it is a main feature of the gaming machine to operate the gaming machine so that the gaming ball is not discharged from the first guiding means to the distribution area in order to enter the gaming ball into the specific ball-in portion. It can be recognized by the player.

[Characteristic K5]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic K3 or the characteristic K4,
A game ball is a ball entry part capable of entering, and a predetermined ball entry part (center side first starting port 33, right side first starting port 44) provided in the distribution area,
A first symbol display means (first symbol display part 37a) for starting variable display of the first symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry part,
A second symbol display means (second symbol display part 37b) for starting the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry part,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means,
When the first symbol and the second symbol are variably displayed, the second symbol display means causes the second symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the first symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic K5, when the game ball is inserted into a specific ball entering portion when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second symbol starts a variable display, and then in a stop display. Transition. At that time, the first symbol also shifts from the variable display to the stop display. Therefore, when the first symbol is variably displayed, it is possible to create a new game property such that the first symbol is stopped and displayed by inserting the game ball into the specific ball entrance portion.

  The inventions of the characteristic G group, the characteristic H group, the characteristic I group, the characteristic J group, and the characteristic K group solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various processing and structure improvements are made for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

  Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of creating new gaming characteristics.

  A configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the characteristic group A to the characteristic group K are appropriately combined may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

  Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation, and a start ball which is provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter Section, the acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering section, and the information acquiring means when the game ball entering the starting ball entering section A gaming machine provided with a storage means for storing special information.

  Spinning machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each mode described in the section of the summary of the invention are provided in order to solve a part or all of the above-mentioned problems, or the above-mentioned technical features. In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. If the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine main body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. .. window 19... glass unit 20... upper plate 21... lower plate 22... discharge port 23... lever 24... production operation button 25... operation handle 25a... Touch sensor 25b...Wait button 25c...Variable resistor 26...Game ball launch button 30...Game board 31...Induction rail 31a...Inner rail part 31b...Outer rail part 32 ...General prize opening 33...Center side first starting opening 34...Second starting opening 34a...Non-motorized accessory 34b...Distribution mechanism 34c...Guide rail 34d...Second Starting port 35a...Through gate 35b...Through gate 36...Variable winning device 36a...Big winning port 36b...Opening/closing door 36c...Variable winning driving unit 37...Special drawing unit 37a ... 1st symbol display section 37b ... 2nd symbol display section 37c ... 1st hold display section 38 ... universal figure unit 39 ... round display section 40 ... variable display unit 41.. Liquid crystal display device 41a... Display surface 41b... Design display area for first liquid crystal 41c... Design display area for second liquid crystal 42... Nail 43... Out port 44... Right first Starting port 44a...electric accessory 44b...electric accessory driver 45...main display 46...speaker 47...various lamps 51...first control unit 52...second Control unit 53... Third control unit 54... Tank 55... Tank rail 56... Case rail 60... Main control unit 61... Main control board 62... Main side MPU
63...Main side ROM
63a... Acceptance table storage area 63b... Sorting table storage area 63c... Reach determination table storage area 63d... Fluctuating time table storage area 63e... Stop result table storage area 63f... Command Information storage area 64...Main RAM
64a... Lottery counter buffer 64b... Suspended information storage area 64c... Judgment processing execution area 64d... Electric role holding area 64e... Electric auditor execution area 64f... Various counter areas 64g ... various flag storage area 64h... destination determination processing result storage area 70... payout control device 71... payout device 80... launch control device 81... game ball launch mechanism 85... power supply Device 86... Blackout monitoring circuit 90... Sound emission control device 91... Sound emission control board 92... Sound side MPU
93... Sound side ROM
93a... Production pattern table storage area 93b... Variable display pattern table storage area 94... Sound side RAM
94a...Various flag storage areas 94b...Various counter areas 94c...Lottery counter area 100...Display control device 101...Display control board 102...Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104... Work RAM
106... Character ROM
107... Video RAM
150... Sorting mechanism 151... Incoming ball portion 152... Wing portion 153... Shaft portion 154... Outgoing ball portion 155... Outgoing ball portion Sync1... First synchronization display portion Sync2. .. Second synchronization display

Claims (4)

A game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area,
A ball entering portion provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Detecting means for detecting the entry of the game ball into the entry part,
A signal is sent when the game ball has not been detected by the detection means, even though the game ball has been emitted by the game ball emission means with a emission intensity satisfying a predetermined emission condition. Signal output means for outputting,
A gaming machine comprising: The gaming machine according to claim 1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Equipped with
The game machine is characterized in that the game-playing unit is a game-playing unit in which the information acquisition unit acquires the special information when the game-playing ball enters the game-playing unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The signal output means,
In the case where the detection means does not detect the entry of the game ball into the entry part within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launches the game ball with a launch strength satisfying the predetermined launch condition, A gaming machine, which outputs the signal. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The signal output means,
Based on the number of times the detection means has not detected the entry of the game ball into the entry part within a predetermined time after the game ball launching means launches the game ball with a launch strength satisfying the predetermined launch condition. And output the signal.